NL2016376A

Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Interacting with a Control Object While Dragging Another Object.

Abstract

An electronic device displays a user interface of a first software application that includes one or more draggable objects and one or more control objects; and, detects a contact on a touch-sensitive surface at a first location while a focus selector is displayed over a first draggable object and a movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to a second location that corresponds to a first control object. In accordance with a determination that the contact at the first location satisfies object selection criteria, the device moves the first draggable object to the first control object in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to the first control object. In accordance with a determination that the contact at the second location satisfies first intensity criteria, the device performs a first predetermined operation that corresponds to activation of the first control object.

NL2016376A, drawing sheet 1 — Sheet 1 of 75

Term

9.5 yearsto projected expiry

Projected expiry 7 March 2036, counted from filing; an application has no term until it is granted.

145 claims: 103 independent, 42 dependent

1
CONCLUSIES 1. Werkwijze, omvattende:het, op een elektronische inrichting met een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak en een beeldscherm, waarbij de elektronische inrichting één of meer sensoren omvat voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak: op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface van een eerste programmatoepassing die een of meer versleepbare objecten omvat en één of meer stuurobjecten onderscheiden van de een of meer versleepbare objecten;en, tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing: detecteren van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak op een eerste lokatie terwijl een aandachtselector wordt vertoond over een eerste versleepbaar object van de een of meer op het beeldscherm vertoonde versleepbare objecten;na het detecteren van de aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak op de eerste lokatie, detecteren van een beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar een tweede locatie die overeenstemt met een eerste stuurobject van de een of meer op het beeldscherm vertoonde stuurobjecten;en, in reactie op het detecteren van beweging van de aanraking vanaf de eerste lokatie naar de tweede locatie, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de eerste lokatie voldoet aan objectselectiecriteria: bewegen van het eerste versleepbare object naar het eerste stuurobject in overeenstemming met de 105 beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar het eerste stuurobject;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de tweede locatie voldoet aan eerste intensiteitcriteria, uitvoeren van een eerste vooraf bepaalde handelingen die overeenstemt met de activering van het eerste stuurobject.
2
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 1, waarbij de objectselectiecriteria tweede intensiteitcriteria omvatten.
3
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 2, omvattende:het, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de eerste lokatie niet voldoet aan de object select ie criteria: naar het eerste stuurobject bewegen van de aandachtselector in overeenstemming met de beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar het eerste stuurobject zonder het eerste versleepbare object naar het eerste stuurobject te bewegen;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de tweede locatie voldoet aan de tweede intensiteitcriteria, uitvoeren van de eerste vooraf bepaalde handeling die overeenstemt met activering van het eerste stuurobject zonder het eerste versleepbare object naar het eerste stuurobject te bewegen.
4
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 1 tot en met 3, waarbi j:de gebruikersinterface meerdere onderscheiden gedeelten omvat;een eerste gedeelte van de meerdere onderscheiden gebieden het eerste stuurobject omvat;en het uitvoeren van de eerste vooraf bepaalde handeling die overeenstemt met de activering van het eerste 106 stuurobject het wijzigen omvat van een tweede gedeelte, onderscheiden van het eerste gedeelte, uit de meerdere onderscheiden gedeelten.
5
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 4, waarbij:de eerste programmatoepassing een kalendertoepassing is;de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing meerdere-tijdspanne gebruikersinterfaceelementen in het eerste gedeelte omvat;de een of meer draagbare objecten een of meer kalenderinvoerobjecten zijn;een betreffend tijdspanne-gebruikersinterface element uit de meerdere tijdspanne-gebruikersinterface elementen overeenstemt met een vooraf bepaalde tijdeenheid;het tweede gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing, voorafgaand aan de vaststelling dat de aanraking op de tweede locatie voldoet aan de eerste intensiteitcriteria, een kalenderweergave omvat die overeenstemt met een eerste tijdeenheid;en het wijzigen van het tweede gedeelte het vervangen omvat van de kalendereergave die overeenstemt met een eerste tijdeenheid door een kalenderweergave die overeenstemt met een tweede tijdeenheid die onderscheiden is van de eerste tijdeenheid.
6
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 4, waarbij:de eerste programmatoepassing een navigatietoepassing voor het bestandsysteem is;de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing meerdere bestandweergave stuurobjecten in het eerste gedeelte omvat;de een of meer versleepbare objecten één of meer bestandsiconen en/of mapiconen zijn;107 een betreffend bestandweergavestuurobject van de meerdere bestandweergavestuurobjecten overeenstemt met een onderscheiden bestandweergavetype;het tweede gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface, voorafgaand aan de vaststelling dat de aanraking op de tweede locatie voldoet aan de eerste intensiteitcriteria, een bestandweergave omvat van een eerste bestandweergavetype;en het wijzigen van het tweede gedeelte het vervangen omvat van de bestandweergave van het eerste bestandweergavetype door een bestandweergave van een tweede bestandweergavetype dat onderscheiden is van de bestandweergave van het eerste bestandweergavetype.
7
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 4 tot en met 6, omvattend:het, opvolgend aan het bewegen van het eerste versleepbare object naar het eerste stuurojbect en het wijzigen van het tweede gedeelte: detecteren van een beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar een derde locatie die overeenstemt met het gewijzigde tweede gedeelte op het beeldscherm;bewegen van het eerste versleepbare object naar een locatie, in het gewijzigde tweede gedeelte, die overeenstemt met de derde locatie op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak in overeenstemming met de beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar de derde locatie;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de derde locatie niet voldoet aan de objectselectiecriteria, plaatsen van het eerste versleepbare object 108 op de locatie, in het gewijzigde tweede gedeelte, die overeenstemt met de derde locatie op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak.
8
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 1 tot en met 7, omvattende:het, in reactie op het bewegen van het eerste versleepbare object naar het eerste stuurobject: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste programmatoepassing is ingericht om de eerste vooraf gedefinieerde handeling uit te voeren in reactie op het detecteren van een aanraking op de tweede lokatie die voldoet aan de eerste intensiteitcriteria, visueel onderscheiden van het eerste stuurobject voorafgaand aan het vaststellen dat de aanraking voldoet aan de eerste intensiteitcriteria .
9
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 8, omvattende:het detecteren van een beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar een vierde locatie die overeenstemt met een tweede stuurobject van de één of meer stuurobjecten;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste programmatoepassing niet is ingericht om een vooraf bepaalde handeling uit te voeren in reactie op het detecteren van een aanraking op de vierde locatie die voldoet aan de eerste intensiteit criteria, afzien van het visueel onderscheiden van het tweede stuurobject.
10
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 1 tot en met 9, omvattende:het gelijktijdig vertonen van de gehele gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing met een 109 gedeelte van een gebruikersinterface van een tweede programmatoepassing aangrenzend aan de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing;in overeenstemming met de vaststelling dat de aanraking op de eerste lokatie voldoet aan de objectselectiecriteria: detecteren van een beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar een vijfde locatie die overeenstemt met het vertoonde gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing op het beeldscherm;bewegen van het eerste versleepbare object naar het vertoonde gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing in overeenstemming met de beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar de vijfde locatie;en, in reactie op een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de vijfde locatie voldoet aan de eerste intensiteitcriteria, vervangen van een gelijktijdige vertoning van de gehele gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing en het gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing door een gelijktijdige vertoning van de gehele gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing en een gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing aangrenzend aan de gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing.
11
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 10, omvattende:het, in reactie op een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de vijfde locatie niet voldoet aan de eerste intensiteit criteria: vaststellen van een tijdspanne gedurende welke de aanraking op de vijfde locatie blijft;en 110 in reactie op een vaststelling dat de tijdspanne voldoet aan op tijd gebaseerde activeringscriteria, vervangen van de gelijktijdige vertoning van het geheel van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing en het gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing door de gelijktijdige vertoning van een geheel van de gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing en het gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing aangrenzend aan de gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing.
12
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak;een of meer verwerkingseenheden;geheugen;en een of meer programma's, waarbij de een of meer programma's zijn opgeslagen in het geheugen en zijn ingericht om te worden uitgevoerd door de een of meer verwerkingseenheden, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten voor het: op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface van een eerste programmatoepassing die één of meer versleepbare objecten omvat en één of meer stuurobjecten onderscheiden van de één of meer versleepbare objecten;en, tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface op de eerste programmatoepassing: detecteren van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak op een eerste lokatie terwijl een aandachtselector wordt vertoond over een eerste verspeelbaar 111 object van de een of meer versleepbare op het beeldscherm vertoonde objecten;na het detecteren van de aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige beeldscherm op de eerste lokatie, detecteren van een beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar een tweede locatie die overeenstemt met een eerste stuurobject van de één of meer op het beeldscherm vertoonde stuurobjecten;en, in reactie op het detecteren van beweging van de aanraking vanaf de eerste lokatie naar de tweede locatie, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de eerste lokatie voldoet aan objectselectiecriteria;het eerste versleepbare object verplaatsen naar het eerste stuurobject in overeenstemming met de beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelig oppervlak naar het eerste stuurobject;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de tweede locatie voldoet aan de eerste intensiteit criteria, uitvoeren van een eerste vooraf bepaalde handeling die overeenstemt met de activering van het eerste stuurobject.
13
Door een computer leesbaar opslagmedium waarop een of meer programma's zijn opgeslagen, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten, die, wanneer deze worden uitgevoerd door een elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak, en een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, veroorzaken dat de inrichting:op het beeldscherm een gebruikersinterface vertoont van een eerste programmatoepassing die een of meer 112 versleepbare objecten omvat en één of meer stuurobjecten onderscheiden van de één of meer versleepbare objecten;en, tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing;een aanraking detecteert op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak op een eerste lokatie terwijl een aandachtselector wordt vertoond over een eerste versleepbaar object van de één of meer op het beeldscherm getoonde versleepbare objecten;na het detecteren van de aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak op de eerste lokatie, een beweging detecteert van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar een tweede lokatie die overeenstemt naar een eerste stuurobject van de één of meer op het beeldscherm getoonde stuurobjecten;en, in reactie op het detecteren van beweging van de aanraking vanaf de eerste lokatie naar de tweede lokatie, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de eerste lokatie voldoet aan objectselectiecriteria: het eerste versleepbare object verplaatst naar het eerste stuurobject in overeenstemming met de beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar het eerste stuurobject;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de tweede lokatie voldoet aan eerste intensiteitcriteria, een eerste vooraf gedefinieerde handeling uitvoert die overeenstemt met activering van het eerste stuurobject.
14
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;113 een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak ;middelen voor het op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface van een eerste programmatoepassing die een of meer versleepbare objecten omvat en een of meer stuurobjecten onderscheiden van de een of meer versleepbare objecten;en, middelen, geactiveerd tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing, omvattende : middelen voor het detecteren van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak op een eerste lokatie terwijl een aandachtselector wordt vertoond over een eerste versleepbaar object van de één of meer versleepbare op het beeldscherm vertoonde objecten;middelen voor het detecteren van een beweging over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar een tweede locatie die overeenstemt met een eerste stuurobject van de één of meer op het beeldscherm getoonde stuurobjecten, na het detecteren van de aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak op de eerste locatie;middelen, geactiveerd in reactie op het detecteren van beweging van de aanraking vanaf de eerste locatie naar de tweede locatie, omvattende: middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de eerste lokatie voldoet aan objectselectiecriteria, voor het verplaatsen van het eerste versleepbare object naar het eerste stuurobject in overeenstemming met de beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar het eerste stuurobject;en 114 middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de eerste locatie voldoet aan objectselectiecriteria, voor het uitvoeren van een eerste vooraf bepaalde handeling die overeenstemt met activering van het eerste stuurobject, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de tweede locatie voldoet aan eerste intensiteitcriteria.
15
Informatieverwerkingsapparaat voor gebruik in een elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak en één of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, omvattende:middelen voor het op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface van een eerste programmatoepassing die een of meer versleepbare objecten omvat en één of meer stuurobjecten gescheiden van de een of meer versleepbare objecten;en middelen, geactiveerd tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing, omvattende : middelen voor het detecteren van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak op een eerste lokatie terwijl een aandachtselector wordt vertoond over een eerste versleepbaar object van de één of meer op het beeldscherm vertoonde versleepbare objecten;middelen voor het detecteren van een beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar een tweede lokatie die overeenstemt met een eerste stuurobject van de één of meer op het beeldscherm vertoonde stuurobjecten, na het detecteren van de aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak op de eerste locatie;en 115 middelen, geactiveerd in reactie op het detecteren van beweging van de aanraking vanaf de eerste lokatie naar de tweede lokatie, omvattend: middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de eerste lokatie voldoet aan objectselectiecriteria, voor het verplaatsen van het eerste versleepbare object naar het eerste stuurobject in overeenstemming met de beweging van de aanraking over het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak naar het eerste stuurobject;en middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de eerste lokatie voldoet aan objectselectiecriteria, voor het uitvoeren van een eerste vooraf bepaalde handeling die overeenstemt met activering van het eerste stuurobject, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de tweede lokatie voldoet aan eerste intensiteitcriteria.
16
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak ;een of meer verwerkingseenheden;geheugen;en een of meer programma's, waarbij de een of meer programma's in het geheugen zijn opgeslagen en zijn ingericht om te worden uitgevoerd door de een of meer verwerkingseenheden, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten voor het uitvoeren van een van de werkwijzen volgens conclusies 1 tot en met 11. 116
17
Door een computer leesbaar opslagmedium waarop een of meer programma's zijn opgeslagen, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten, die, wanneer deze worden uitgevoerd door een elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak en een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, veroorzaken dat de inrichting een van de werkwijzen volgens conclusies 1 tot en met 11 uitvoert.
18
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak;en middelen voor het uitvoeren van een van de werkwijzen volgens conclusies 1 tot en met 11.
19
Intormatieverwerkingsapparaat voor gebruik in een elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, en aanraakgevoelig oppervlak, en een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, omvattend:middelen voor het uitvoeren van een van de werkwijze volgens conclusies 1 tot en met 11.
20
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:een beeldschermeenheid ingericht voor het vertonen van een gebruikersinterface;een aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid ingericht voor het detecteren van aanraking op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid;117 een of meer sensoreenheden ingericht voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid;en een verwerkingseenheid gekoppeld aan de beeldschermeenheid, de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid, en de een of meer sensoreenheden, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het: activeren van een vertoning van een gebruikersinterface van een eerste programmatoepassing die een of meer versleepbare objecten omvat en een of meer stuurobjecten onderscheiden van de een of meer versleepbare objecten;en, tijdens het activeren van de vertoning van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing: detecteren van een aanraking op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid op een eerste lokatie terwijl een aandachtselector wordt vertoond over een eerste versleepbaar object van de een of meer op de beeldschermeenheid vertoonde versleepbare objecten;na het detecteren van de aanraking op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid naar een tweede locatie die overeenstemt met een eerste stuurobject van de een of meer op de beeldschermeenheid vertoonde stuurobjecten;en, in reactie op het detecteren van beweging van de aanraking van de eerste lokatie naar de tweede locatie, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de eerste lokatie voldoet aan objectselectiecriteria: verplaatsen van het eerste versleepbare object in overeenstemming met de beweging van de 118 aanraking over de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid naar het eerste stuurobject;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de tweede locatie voldoet aan eerste intensiteitcriteria, uitvoeren van een eerste vooraf bepaalde handeling die overeenstemt met activering van het eerste stuurobject.
21
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 20, waarbij de objectselectiecriteria tweede intensiteitcriteria omvatten.
22
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 21, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het:in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de eerste locatie niet voldoet aan de objectselectiecriteria: verplaatsen van de aandachtselector naar het eerste stuurobject zonder het eerste versleepbare object naar het eerste stuurobject te verplaatsen;en in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de tweede lokatie voldoet aan de tweede intensiteitcriteria, uitvoeren van de eerste vooraf bepaalde handeling die overeenstemt met de activering van het eerste stuurobject zonder het eerste versleepbare object naar het eerste stuurobject te verplaatsen.
23
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 20 tot en met 22, waarbij:de eerste gebruikersinterface meerdere onderscheiden gedeelten omvat;een eerste gedeelte van de meerdere onderscheiden gedeelten het eerste stuurobject omvat;en het uitvoeren van de eerste vooraf bepaalde handeling die overeenstemt met de activering van het eerste 119 stuurobject het wijzigen van een tweede gedeelte omvat, onderscheiden van het eerste gedeelte, van de meerdere onderscheiden gedeelten.
24
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 23, waarbij:de eerste programmatoepassing een kalendertoepassing is;de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing meerdere-tijdspanne gebruikersinterfaceelementen in het eerste gedeelte omvat;de een of meer versleepbare objecten een of meer kalenderinvoerobjecten zijn;een betreffend tijdspanne gebruikersinterface element van de meerdere-tijdspanne gebruikersinterface-elementen overeenstemt met een vooraf gedefinieerde tijdeenheid;het tweede gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing, voorafgaand aan de vaststelling dat de aanraking op de tweede locatie voldot aan de eerste intensiteitcriteria, een kalenderweergave omvat die overeenstemt met een eerste tijdeenheid;en het wijzigen van het tweede gedeelte het vervangen omvat van de kalenderweergave die overeenstemt met een eerste tijd eenheid door een kalenderweergave die overeenstemt met een tweede tijdeenheid die onderscheiden is van de eerste tijdeenheid.
25
Elektronische eenheid volgens conclusie 23, waarbij:de eerste programmatoepassing een navigatietoepassing voor bestandsystemen is;de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing meerdere bestandsweergavestuurobjecten omvat in het eerste gedeelte;120 de een of meer versleepbare objecten een of meer bestandiconen en/of mapiconen zijn;een betreffend bestandweergavestuurobject van de meerdere bestandweergavestuurobjecten overeenstemt met een onderscheiden bestandweergavetype;het tweede gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface, voorafgaand aan de vaststelling dat de aanraking op de tweede locatie voldoet aan de eerste intensiteit criteria, een bestandweergave omvat van een eerste bestandweergavetype;en het wijzigen van het tweede gedeelte het vervangen omvat van de bestandweergave van het eerste bestandweergavetype door een bestandweergave van een tweede bestandweergavetype die onderscheiden is van de bestandweergave van het eerste bestandweergavetype.
26
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van conclusies 23 tot en met 25, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het:opvolgend aan het verplaatsen van het eerste versleepbare object naar het eerste stuurobject en het veranderen van het tweede gedeelte: detecteren van een beweging van de aanraking over de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakteeenheid naar een derde locatie die overeenstemt met het veranderde tweede gedeelte op de beeldschermeenheid;verplaatsen van het eerste versleepbare object naar een locatie, in het veranderde tweede gedeelte, die overeenstemt met de derde locatie op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid in overeenstemming met de beweging van de aanraking over de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid naar de derde locatie;en, 121 in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de derde locatie niet voldoet aan de objectselectiecriteria, het eerste versleepbare object plaatsen op de locatie, in het veranderde tweede gedeelte, die overeenstemt met de derde locatie op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte eenheid.
27
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van conclusies 20 tot en met 26, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het:in reactie op het verplaatsen van het eerste vergelijkbare object naar het eerste stuurobject: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste programmatoepassing is ingericht voor het uitvoeren van de eerste vooraf bepaalde handeling in reactie op het detecteren van een aanraking op de tweede locatie die voldoet aan de eerste intensiteitcriteria, visuele onderscheiden van het eerste stuurobject voorafgaand aan het vaststellen dat de aanraking voldoet aan de eerste intensiteitcriteria.
28
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 27, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het:detecteren van een beweging van de aanraking over de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid naar een vierde lokatie die overeenstemt met een tweede stuurobject van de een of meer stuurobjecten;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste programmatoepassing niet is ingericht voor het uitvoeren van een vooraf bepaalde handeling in reactie op het detecteren van een aanraking op de vierde lokatie die voldoet aan de eerste intensiteitcriteria, afzien van het visuele onderscheiden van het tweede stuurobject. 122
29
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 20 tot en met 28, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het:gelijktijdig activeren van een vertoning van de gehele gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing door een gedeelte van een gebruikersinterface van een tweede programmatoepassing aangrenzend aan de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing;in overeenstemming met de vaststelling dat de aanraking op de eerste lokatie voldoet aan de objectselectiecriteria: detecteren van een beweging van de aanraking over de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid naar een vijfde locatie die overeenstemt met het vertoonde gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing op de beeldschermeenheid;verplaatsen van het eerste versleepbare object naar het vertoonde gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing in overeenstemming met de beweging van de aanraking over de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid naar de vijfde locatie;en, in reactie op een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de vijfde locatie voldoet aan de eerste intensiteitcriteria, vervanging activeren van een gelijktijdige vertoning van de gehele gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing het gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing door een gelijktijdige vertoning van de gehele gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing een gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing aangrenzend aan de gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing. 123
30
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 29, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het:in reactie op een vaststelling dat de aanraking op de vijfde locatie niet voldoet aan de eerste intensiteitcriteria: vaststellen van een tijdspanne gedurende welke de aanraking op de vijfde locatie blijft;en in reactie op een vaststelling dat de tijdspanne aan op tijd gebaseerde activeringscriteria voldoet, activeren van vervanging van de gelijktijdige vertoning van de gehele gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing en het gedeelte van een gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing door de gelijktijdige vertoning van de gehele gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing en het gedeelte van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing naast de gebruikersinterface van de tweede programmatoepassing.
31
Werkwijze, omvattende:het, op een elektronische inrichting met een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak en een beeldscherm, waarbij de elektronische inrichting een of meer sensoren omvat voor het detecteren van de intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak: op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface van een eerste programmatoepassing;en, tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing: detecteren van een eerste invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelig oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is 124 geassocieerd met een betreffend gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing dat is geassocieerd met een eerste handeling en een tweede handeling;in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat een eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de eerste invoer, uitvoeren van de eerste handeling zonder een tactiele uitvoer voort te brengen;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat een tweede tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de eerste invoer, uitvoeren van de eerste handeling zonder een tactiele uitvoer voort te brengen;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat een tweede tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de eerste invoer, afzien van de eerste handeling;en, detecteren van een tweede invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de tweede invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het betreffende gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing dat is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling en de tweede handeling en de tweede invoer verschillend is van de eerste invoer;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, uitvoeren van de eerste handeling in samenhang met het voortbrengen van een eerste tactiele uitvoer die is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling;en, 125 in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, uitvoeren van de tweede handeling.
32
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 31, omvattende:het detecteren van een derde invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de derde invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het betreffende gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing dat is geassocieerd met het betreffende gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing dat is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling en de tweede handeling en de derde invoer verschillend is van de eerste invoer en de tweede invoer;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de derde invoer : in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de derde invoer, uitvoeren van de tweede handeling in samenhang met het voortbrengen van een tweede tactiele uitvoer die is geassocieerd met het tweede handeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de derde invoer, afzien van voortbrenging van de tweede tactiele uitvoer.
33
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 32, waarbij de tweede tactiele uitvoer een hoorbare component omvat die luider is dan een hoorbare component van de eerste tactiele uitvoer.
34
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 32 tot en met 33, waarbij de eerste tactiele uitvoer een eerste tactiele-uitvoerintensiteit heeft en de tweede tactiele uitvoer 126 een tweede tactiele-uitvoerintensiteit heeft die groter is dan de eerste tactiele-uitvoerintensiteit.
35
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 32 tot en met 34, omvattende, het, in reactie op het detecteren van de derde invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is, afzien van het herhalen van de tweede handeling.
36
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 32 tot en met 35, waarbij de aanraking in de tweede invoer en de aanraking in de derde invoer in een zelfde aanraking zijn die ononderbroken wordt gedetecteerd op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak tussen de tweede invoer en de derde invoer.
37
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 32 tot en met 36, waarbij de aanraking in de tweede invoer voldoet aan de eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde en de aanraking in de derde invoer voldoet aan tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde die hoger is dan de eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde.
38
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 31 tot en met 37, omvattende het, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met de vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, uitvoeren van de tweede handeling zonder de eerste handeling uit te voeren.
39
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 31 tot en met 38, omvattende het, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, afzien van voortbrenging van de eerste tactiele uitvoer .
40
Werkwijze volgens een van conclusies 31 tot en met 39, omvattende het, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met de vaststelling dat de 127 eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, afzien van voortbrenging van een tweede tactiele uitvoer die is geassocieerd met de tweede handeling.
41
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 31 tot en met 40, waarbij de eerste tactiele uitvoer minder dan een vooraf bepaalde tijdspanne voortduurt.
42
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak ;een of meer verwerkingseenheden;geheugen;en een of meer programma's, waarbij de een of meer programma's in het geheugen zijn opgeslagen en zijn ingericht om te worden uitgevoerd door de een of meer verwerkingseenheden, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten voor het: op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface van een eerste programmatoepassing;en, tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing: detecteren van een eerste invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelig oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met een betreffend gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing die is geassocieerd met een eerste handeling en een tweede handeling;in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer: 128 in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat een tweede tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de eerste invoer, afzien van het uitvoeren van de eerste handeling;detecteren van een tweede invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de tweede invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het betreffende gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing dat is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling en de tweede handeling en de tweede invoer verschillend is van de eerste invoer;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, uitvoeren van de eerste handeling in samenhang met het voortbrengen van een eerste tactiele uitvoer die is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, uitvoeren van de tweede handeling.
43
Door een computer leesbaar opslagmedium waarop een of meer programma's zijn opgeslagen, waarbij de programma's instructies omvatten die, wanneer deze worden uitgevoerd door de elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een van aanraakgevoelig oppervlak, en een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, veroorzaken dat de inrichting:op het beeldscherm een gebruikersinterface vertoont van een eerste programmatoepassing;en, tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing: 129 een eerste invoer detecteert die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met een betreffend gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing dat is geassocieerd met een eerste handeling en een tweede handeling;in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de eerste invoer, afziet van het uitvoeren van de eerste handeling;een tweede invoer detecteert die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de tweede invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het betreffende gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing die is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling en de tweede handeling en de tweede invoer verschillend is van de eerste invoer;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, de eerste handeling uitvoert een samenhang met het voortbrengen van een eerste tactiele uitvoer die is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, de tweede handeling uitvoert.
44
Elektronische inrichting, omvattend:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;130 een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak ;middelen voor het op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface van een eerste programmatoepassing;en middelen, geactiveerd tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing, omvattend : middelen voor het detecteren van een eerste invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met een betreffend gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing dat is geassocieerd met een eerste handeling en een tweede handeling;middelen, geactiveerd in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer, omvattende: middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat een eerste tactieleuitvoerinstelling actief is voor de eerste invoer, voor het uitvoeren van de eerste handeling zonder een tactiele uitvoer voort te brengen;en, middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat een tweede tactieleuitvoerinstelling actief is voor de eerste invoer, voor het afzien van het uitvoeren van de eerste handeling;middelen voor het detecteren van een tweede invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de tweede invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het betreffende gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing 131 dat is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling en de tweede handeling en de tweede invoer verschillend is van de eerste invoer;en, middelen, geactiveerd in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, omvattend: middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede tactieleuitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, voor het uitvoeren van de eerste handeling in samenhang met het vóórtbrengen van een eerste tactiele uitvoer die is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling;en, middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactieleuitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, uitvoeren van de tweede handeling.
45
informatieverwerkingsapparaat voor gebruik in de elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak en een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, omvattende:middelen voor het op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface van een eerste programmatoepassing;en middelen, geactiveerd tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing, omvattend : middelen voor het detecteren van een eerste invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met een betreffend gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing 132 dat is geassocieerd met een eerste handeling en een tweede handeling;middelen, geactiveerd in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer, omvattende: middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat een eerste tactieleuitvoerinstelling actief is voor de eerste invoer, voor het uitvoeren van de eerste handeling zonder een tactiele uitvoer voort te brengen;en middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat een tweede tactieleuitvoerinstelling actief is voor de eerste invoer, het afzien van het uitvoeren van de eerste handeling;middelen voor het detecteren van een tweede invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de tweede invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het betreffende gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing dat is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling en de tweede handeling en de tweede invoer verschillend is van de eerste invoer;en, middelen, geactiveerd in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, omvattend: middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, voor het uitvoeren van de eerste behandeling in samenhang met het voortbrengen van een eerste tactiele uitvoer die is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling;en middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling 133 actief is voor de tweede invoer, voor het uitvoeren van een tweede handeling.
46
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:een of meer verwerkingseenheden;geheugen;en een of meer programma's, waarbij de een of meer programma's in het geheugen zijn opgeslagen en zijn ingericht om te worden uitgevoerd door de een of meer verwerkingseenheden, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten voor het uitvoeren van een van de werkwijze volgens conclusies 31 tot en met 41.
47
Door een computer leesbaar opslagmedium waarop een of meer programma's zijn opgeslagen, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten die, wanneer deze worden uitgevoerd door een elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak en een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, veroorzaken dat de inrichting een van de werkwijze volgens conclusies 31 tot en met 41 uitvoert.
48
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak;en 134 middelen voor het uitvoeren van een van de werkwijze volgens conclusies 31 tot en met 41.
49
Informatieverwerkingsapparaat voor gebruik in een elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak en een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, omcattende:Middelen voor het uitvoeren van een van de werkwijzen volgens conclusies 31 tot en met 41.
50
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:een beeldschermeenheid ingericht voor het vertonen van een gebruikersinterface;een aanraakgevoelige-oppervlakte-eenheid ingericht voor het detecteren van aanraking op de aanraakgevoelige- oppervlakte-eenheid;een of meer sensoreenheden ingericht voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op de aanraakgevoelige-oppervlakte-eenheid;en een verwerkingseenheid gekoppeld aan de beeldschermeenheid, de aanraakgevoelige-oppervlakte-eenheid en de een of meer sensoreenheden, waarbij de een of meer sensoreenheden, de verwerkingseenheid zijn ingericht voor het: activeren van vertoning van een gebruikersinterface van een eerste programmatoepassing;en, tijdens het activeren van de vertoning van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing: detecteren van een eerste invoer die een op de aanraakgevoelige- oppervlakte-eenheid gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met een betreffend gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing die is 135 geassocieerd met een eerste handeling en een tweede handeling;in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat een eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de eerste invoer, uitvoeren van de eerste handeling zonder een tactiele uitvoer voort te brengen;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat een tweede tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de eerste invoer, afzien van uitvoering van de eerste handeling;en, detecteren van een tweede invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de tweede invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het betreffende gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing dat is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling en de tweede handeling en de tweede invoer verschillend is van de eerste invoer;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, uitvoeren van de eerste handeling in samenhang met het voortbrengen van een eerste tactiele uitvoer die is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, uitvoeren van de tweede handeling.
51
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 50, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het:136 detecteren van een derde invoer die een op de aanraakgevoelige-oppervlakte-eenheid gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de derde invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het betreffende gebied van de gebruikersinterface van de eerste programmatoepassing die is geassocieerd met de eerste handeling en de tweede handeling en de derde invoer verschillend is van de eerste invoer en de tweede invoer;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de derde invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de derde invoer, uitvoeren van de tweede handeling in samenhang met het voortbrengen van een tweede tactiele uitvoer die is geassocieerd met de tweede handeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de derde invoer, afzien van het voortbrengen van de tweede tactiele uitvoer.
52
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 51, waarbij de tweede tactiele uitvoer een hoorbare component omvat die luider is dan de hoorbare component van de eerste tactiele uitvoer.
53
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 51 tot en met 52, waarbij de eerste tactiele uitvoer een eerste tactiele uitvoerintensiteit heeft en de tweede tactiele uitvoer een tweede tactiele uitvoerintensiteit heeft die groter is dan de eerste tactiele uitvoerintensiteit.
54
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 51 tot en met 53, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid bovendien is ingericht voor het, in reactie op het detecteren 137 van de derde invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is, afzien van het herhalen van de tweede handeling.
55
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 51 tot en met 54, waarbij de aanraking in de tweede invoer en de aanraking in de derde invoer een zelfde aanraking zijn die ononderbroken wordt waargenomen in de aanraakgevoelige-oppervlakte-eenheid tussen de tweede invoer en de derde invoer.
56
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 51 tot en met 55, waarbij de aanraking in de tweede invoer voldoet aan eerste intensiteit drempelwaarde en de aanraking in het derde invoer voldoet aan tweede intensiteit drempelwaarde die hoger is dan de eerste intensiteit drempelwaarde.
57
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 50 tot en met 56, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, uitvoeren van de tweede handeling zonder de eerste handeling uit te voeren.
58
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van conclusies 50 tot en met 57, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met de vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoer-instelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, afzien van voortbrenging van de eerste tactiele uitvoer .
59
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 50 tot en met 58, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het, in reactie op het detecteren van de 138 tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met de vaststelling dat de eerste tactiele-uitvoerinstelling actief is voor de tweede invoer, afzien van het voortbrengen van een tweede tactiele uitvoer die is geassocieerd aan de tweede handeling.
60
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 50 tot en met 59, waarbij de eerste tactiele uitvoer minder dan een vooraf bepaalde tijdspanne duurt.
61
Werkwijze, omvattende:het, op een elektronische inrichting met een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak en een beeldscherm, waarbij de elektronische inrichting een of meer sensoren omvat voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak: op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface die omvat: een eerste gebied van is ingericht voor het initiëren van een eerste vertoningshandeling in reactie op invoer die voldoet aan eerste activeringcriteria en het initiëren van een tweede vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan tweede activeringscriteria onderscheiden van de eerste activeringscriteria;en een tweede gebied dat onderscheiden is van het eerste gebied, waarbij het tweede gebied is ingericht om een derde vertoningshandeling te initiëren in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria en het tweede gebied niet is ingericht voor het initiëren van enige vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria;en, tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface : 139 detecteren van een eerste invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het eerste gebied van de gebruikersinterface ;in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de eerste vertoningshandeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de tweede actief is, uitvoeren van de tweede vertoningshandeling en gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een eerste type tijdens het uitvoeren van de tweede vertoningshandeling;detecteren van een tweede invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de tweede invoer onderscheiden is van de eerste invoer en de in de tweede invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het tweede gebied van de gebruikersinterface;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling;en in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat tweede invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een tweede type. 140
62
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 61, waarbij de tactiele uitvoer van het tweede type is onderscheiden van de tactiele uitvoer van het eerste type.
63
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 61 tot en met 62, omvattende:het, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, afzien van de eerste vertoningshandeling, de tweede vertoningshandeling, en de derde vertoningshandeling.
64
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 61 tot en met 63, omvattend:het, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een vierde type die is onderscheiden van de tactiele uitvoer van de derde type tijdens het uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling .
65
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 64, omvattend:het, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een tactiele uitvoer van een vierde type dat onderscheiden is van de tactiele uitvoer van het derde type tijdens het uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling.
66
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 64, omvattend:het, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van het 141 derde type tijdens het uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling.
67
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 66, waarbij de gebruikersinterface een derde gebied omvat dat niet is ingericht voor het initiëren van enige vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan eerste activeringscriteria niet is ingericht voor het initiëren van enige vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan een tweede activeringscriteria onderscheiden van de eerste activeringscriteria:het detecteren van een derde invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het derde gebied van de gebruikersinterface;en in reactie op het detecteren van de derde invoer : in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de derde invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van het derde type;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de derde invoer voldoet aan de tweede activering's tweede, voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van het tweede type.
68
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 64 tot en met 67, waarbij de tactiele uitvoer van het tweede type minder opvallendheid heeft dan de opvallendheid van de tactiele uitvoer van het eerste type.
69
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 64 tot en met 68, waarbij de tactiele uitvoer van het tweede type minder opvallend tijd heeft dan de opvallend tijd van de tactiele uitvoer van het eerste type en een grotere opvallend 142 tijd dan opvallend uit van de tactiele uitvoer van het tweede type.
70
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 61 tot en met 69, waarbij de eerste activeringscriteria eerste intensiteitcriteria omvatten.
71
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 61 tot en met 70, waarbij de tweede activeringscriteria tweede intensiteitcriteria omvatten onderscheiden van de eerste intensiteitcriteria.
72
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 61 tot en met 71, omvattende:het, in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer niet voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria en niet voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, afzien van het voortbrengen van enige tactiele uitvoer;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede invoer niet voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria niet voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, afzien van het voortbrengen van enige tactiele uitvoer.
73
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 61 tot en met 72, omvattend:het detecteren van een voorkomen van een vooraf gedefinieerde gebeurtenis die is geassocieerd met het tweede gebied terwijl het tweede gebied niet is ingericht voor het initiëren van enige vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria;terwijl het tweede gebied is ingericht voor het initiëren van de vierde vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria: 143 detecteren van een vierde invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de derde invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het tweede gebied van de gebruikersinterface;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de vierde invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de vierde invoer voldoet aan de derde activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de vierde invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de vierde vertoningshandeling en gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van het eerste type test uitvoeren van de tweede vertoningshandeling.
74
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 61 tot en met 73, waarbij het eerste gebied een gebied is dat een gebruikers-interfacebedienings omvat en het tweede gebied een gebied is dat geen gebruikersinterfacebediening omvat.
75
Werkwijze volgens een van conclusies 61 tot en met 74, waarbij de gebruikersinterface een veelheid gebieden omvat die zijn ingericht voor het uitvoeren van vertoningshandeling in reactie op invoeren die voldoen aan de tweede activeringscriteria, en gebieden van de gebruikersinterface die buiten de veelheidgebieden liggen niet zijn ingericht voor het uitvoeren van vertoningshandeling en op invoeren die voldoen aan de tweede activeringcriteria.
76
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 61 tot en met 75, waarbij de gebruikersinterface wordt voortgebracht door een eerste toepassing die op de inrichting draait en de 144 vaststelling of de eerste tactiele uitvoer of de tweede tactiele uitvoer dient te worden verschaft wanneer aan de tweede verzameling activeringscriteria is voldaan wordt uitgevoerd door een tweede toepassing die op de inrichting draait die onderscheiden is van de eerste toepassing.
77
Elektronische inrichting, omvattend:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteit van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak ;een of meer verwerkingseenheden;geheugen;en een of meer programma's, waarbij de een of meer programma's in het geheugen zijn opgeslagen en zijn ingericht om te worden uitgevoerd door de een of meer verwerkingseenheden, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten voor het: op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface die omvat: een eerste gebied dat is ingericht voor het initiëren van een eerste vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan eerste activeringscriteria en het initiëren van een tweede vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan een tweede activeringscriteria onderscheiden van de eerste activeringscriteria;en, een tweede gebied dat is onderscheiden van het eerste gebied, waarin het tweede gebied is ingericht voor het initiëren van een derde vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria en het tweede gebied niet is ingericht voor het initiëren van enige vertoningshandeling in reactie 145 op een invoer die voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria;en, tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface : detecteren van een eerste gebruikersinvoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het eerste gebied van de gebruikersinterface;in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de eerste vertoningshandeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de tweede vertoningshandeling en gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een eerste type tijdens het uitvoeren van de tweede verton ingshandeling;detecteren van een tweede invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de tweede invoer onderscheiden is van de eerste invoer en de in de tweede invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het tweede gebied van de gebruikersinterface;een, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de eerste 146 activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat tweede invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een tweede type.
78
Door een computer leesbaar opslagmedium waarop een of meer programma's zijn opgeslagen, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten, die, wanneer deze worden uitgevoerd door een elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak, en een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteit van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, veroorzaken dat de inrichting :op het beeldscherm een gebruikersinterface vertoont die omvat: een eerste gebied dat is ingericht voor het initiëren van een eerste vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan eerste activeringscriteria en het initiëren van een tweede vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan een tweede activeringscriteria onderscheiden van de eerste activeringscriteria;en, een tweede gebied dat is onderscheiden van het eerste gebied, waarin het tweede gebied is ingericht voor het initiëren van een derde vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria en het tweede gebied niet is ingericht voor het initiëren van enige vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria;en, tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface : 147 detecteren van een eerste gebruikersinvoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het eerste gebied van de gebruikersinterface;in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de eerste vertoningshandeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de tweede vertoningshandeling en gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een eerste type tijdens het uitvoeren van de tweede verton ingshande ling;detecteren van een tweede invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de tweede invoer onderscheiden is van de eerste invoer en de in de tweede invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het tweede gebied van de gebruikersinterface;een, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat tweede invoer voldoet aan de tweede 148 activeringscriteria, voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een tweede type.
79
Elektronische inrichting, omvattend:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van de intensiteit van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak ;middelen voor het op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface die omvat: een eerste gebied dat is ingericht voor het initiëren van een eerste vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan eerste activeringscriteria en het initiëren van een tweede vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan een tweede activeringscriteria onderscheiden van de eerste activeringscriteria;en, een tweede gebied dat onderscheiden is van het eerste gebied, waarbij het tweede gebied is ingericht voor het initiëren van een derde vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria en het tweede gebied niet is ingericht voor het initiëren van enige vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria;en middelen, geactiveerd tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface, omvattende: middelen voor het detecteren van een eerste gebruikersinvoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het eerste gebied van de gebruikersinterface;149 middelen, geactiveerd in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer, omvattend: middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, voor het uitvoeren van de eerste vertoningshandeling;en, middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, voor het uitvoeren van de tweede vertoningshandeling en gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een eerste type tijdens het uitvoeren van de tweede vertoningshandeling;middelen voor het detecteren van een tweede invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de tweede invoer onderscheiden is van de eerste invoer en de in de tweede invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het tweede gebied van de gebruikersinterface;en, middelen, geactiveerd in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, omvattend: middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, voor het uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling;en, middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat tweede invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, voor het voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een tweede type.
80
Informatieverwerkingsapparaat voor gebruik in de elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak en een of meer sensoren voor het 150 detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, omvattende:middelen voor het op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface die omvat: een eerste gebied dat is ingericht voor het initiëren van een eerste vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan eerste activeringscriteria en het initiëren van een tweede vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan een tweede activeringscriteria onderscheiden van de eerste activeringscriteria;en, een tweede gebied dat onderscheiden is van het eerste gebied, waarbij het tweede gebied is ingericht voor het initiëren van een derde vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria en het tweede gebied niet is ingericht voor het initiëren van enige vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria;en middelen, geactiveerd tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface, omvattende: middelen voor het detecteren van een eerste gebruikersinvoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het eerste gebied van de gebruikersinterface;middelen, geactiveerd in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer, omvattend: middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, voor het uitvoeren van de eerste vertoningshandeling;en, 151 middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, voor het uitvoeren van de tweede vertoningshandeling en gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een eerste type tijdens het uitvoeren van de tweede vertoningshandeling;middelen voor het detecteren van een tweede invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de tweede invoer onderscheiden is van de eerste invoer en de in de tweede invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het tweede gebied van de gebruikersinterface;en, middelen, geactiveerd in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, omvattend: middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, voor het uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling;en, middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat tweede invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, voor het voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een tweede type.
81
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak ;een of meer verwerkingseenheden;geheugen;en 152 een of meer programma's, waarbij de een of meer programma's in het geheugen zijn opgeslagen en zijn ingericht om te worden uitgevoerd door de een of meer verwerkingseenheden, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten voor het uitvoeren van een van de werkwijzen volgens conclusies 61 tot en met 76.
82
Door een computer leesbaar opslagmedium waarop een of meer programma's zijn opgeslagen, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten die, wanneer deze worden uitgevoerd door een elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak en een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteit van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, veroorzaken dat de inrichting een van de werkwijzen volgens conclusies 61 tot en met 76 uitvoert.
83
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak;en middelen voor het uitvoeren van een van de werkwijzen volgens conclusies 61 tot en met 76.
84
Informatieverwerkingsapparaat voor gebruik een elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak, en een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteit van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, omvattende:middelen voor het uitvoeren van een van de werkwijzen volgens conclusies 61 tot en met 76.
85
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:153 een beeldschermeenheid ingericht voor het vertonen van een gebruikersinterface;een aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid ingericht voor het detecteren van een aanraking op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid;een of meer sensoreneenheden ingericht voor het detecteren van de intensiteit van aanrakingen op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid;een of meer tactiele-uitvoereenheden;en een verwerkingseenheid die is gekoppeld met de beeldscherm en het, de aanraakgevoelig oppervlak de eenheid, een of meer sensoreneenheden, en de een of meer tactiele uitvoereenheden, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het: activeren van een vertoning van de gebruikersinterface die omvat: een eerste gebied dat is ingericht voor het initiëren van een eerste vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan eerste activeringscriteria en het initiëren van een tweede vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan een tweede activeringscriteria onderscheiden van de eerste activeringscriteria;een tweede gebied dat onderscheiden is van het eerste gebied, waarbij het tweede gebied is ingericht voor het initiëren van een derde vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria en het tweede gebied niet is ingericht voor het initiëren van enige vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria;en tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface, omvattende: 154 detecteren van een eerste gebruikersinvoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het eerste gebied van de gebruikersinterface;in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer, omvattend: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de eerste vertoningshandeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de tweede vertoningshandeling en gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een eerste type tijdens het uitvoeren van de tweede vertoningshandeling;detecteren van een tweede invoer die een op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de tweede invoer onderscheiden is van de eerste invoer en de in de tweede invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het tweede gebied van de gebruikersinterface;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, voor het uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling;en, 155 in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat tweede invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een tweede type.
86
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 85, waarbij de tactiele uitvoer van het tweede type onderscheiden is van de tactiele uitvoer van het eerste type.
87
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 85 tot en met 86, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid bovendien is ingericht voor het:in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met de vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, afzien van de eerste vertoningshandeling, de tweede vertoningshandeling en de derde vertoningshandeling.
88
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van conclusies 85 tot en met 87, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid bovendien is ingericht voor het:in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een derde type dat onderscheiden is van de tactiele uitvoer van het eerste type tijdens het uitvoeren van de eerste vertoningshandeling.
89
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 88, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid bovendien is ingericht voor het:in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met de vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van een vierde type 156 dat onderscheiden is van de tactiele uitvoer van het derde type tijdens het uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling.
90
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 88, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid bovendien is ingericht voor het:in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met de vaststelling dat de tweede invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van het derde type tijdens het uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling.
91
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 90, waarbij de gebruikersinterface een derde gebied omvat dat niet is ingericht voor het initiëren van enige vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan een eerste activeringscriteria niet is ingericht voor het initiëren van enige vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan tweede activeringscriteria onderscheiden van de eerste activeringscriteria, en de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het:detecteren van een derde invoer die een op de aanraakgevoelig oppervlak twee-eenheid gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de eerste invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het derde gebied van de gebruikersinterface;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de derde invoer : in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de derde invoer voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria, voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van het derde type;en, 157 in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de derde invoer voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van het tweede type.
92
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 88 tot en met 91, waarbij de tactiele uitvoer van het tweede type minder opvallend het heeft dan de opvallend huid van de tactiele uitvoer van het eerste type.
93
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 88 tot en met 92, waarbij de tactiele uitvoer van het derde type minder opvallendheid heeft dan opvallendheid van de tactiele uitvoer van het eerste type en grotere opvallendheid dan opvallendheid van de tactiele uitvoer van het tweede type.
94
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 85 tot en met 93, waarbij de eerste activeringscriteria eerste intensiteitcriteria omvatten.
95
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 85 tot en met 94, waarbij de tweede activeringscriteria tweede intensiteitcriteria omvatten onderscheiden van de eerste intensiteitcriteria.
96
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 85 tot en met 95, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid bovendien is ingericht voor het:in reactie op het detecteren van de eerste invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de eerste invoer niet voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria niet voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, afzien van het voortbrengen van enige tactiele uitvoer;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de tweede invoer, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de tweede invoer niet voldoet aan de eerste activeringscriteria en niet 158 voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria, afzien van het voortbrengen van enige tactiele uitvoer.
97
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van conclusies 85 tot en met 96, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid bovendien is ingericht voor het:detecteren van een voorkomen van een voorgedefinieerde gebeurtenis die is geassocieerd met het tweede gebied terwijl het tweede gebied niet is geconfigureerd voor het initiëren van enige vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria;in reactie op het detecteren van het voorkomen van de voorgedefinieerde gebeurtenis, inrichten van het tweede gebied voor het initiëren van een vierde vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria;en, terwijl het tweede gebied is ingericht voor het initiëren van de vierde vertoningshandeling in reactie op een invoer die voldoet aan de tweede activeringscriteria: detecteren van een vierde invoer die een op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid gedetecteerde aanraking omvat, waarbij de in de derde invoer vervatte aanraking is geassocieerd met het tweede gebied van de gebruikersinterface;en, in reactie op het detecteren van de vierde invoer: in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de vierde invoer voldoet aan de derde activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de derde vertoningshandeling;en, in overeenstemming met een vaststelling dat de vierde invoer voldoet aan de tweede 159 activeringscriteria, uitvoeren van de vierde vertoningshandeling een gelijktijdig voortbrengen van een tactiele uitvoer van het eerste type tijdens het uitvoeren van de tweede verton ingshande ling .
98
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van conclusies 85 tot en met 97, waarbij het eerste gebied een gebied is dat een gebruikersinterfacebediening omvat en het tweede gebied een gebied is dat geen gebruikersinterfacebediening omvat.
99
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 85 tot en met 98, waarbij de gebruikersinterface een veelheid gebieden omvat die zijn ingericht voor het uitvoeren van vertoningshandeling een in reactie op invoeren die voldoen aan de tweede activeringscriteria, en gebieden van de gebruikersinterface die buiten de veelheidgebieden liggen niet zijn ingericht voor het uitvoeren van vertoningshandelingen op invoeren die voldoen aan de tweede activeringscriteria.
100
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 85 tot en met 99, waarbij de gebruikersinterface wordt voortgebracht door een eerste toepassing die op de inrichting draait en de vaststelling of de eerste tactiele uitvoer of de tweede tactiele uitvoer dient te worden verschaft wanneer is voldaan aan de tweede verzameling activeringscriteria wordt uitgevoerd door een tweede toepassing die op de inrichting draait die onderscheiden is van de eerste toepassing.
101
Werkwijze, omvattende:het, op een elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak, een of meer sensoren 160 die intensiteit een detecteren van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelig oppervlak, en een of meer tactieleuitvoergeneratoren, waarbij: de inrichting is ingericht voor het verschaffen van een eerste tactiele uitvoer in reactie op het detecteren dat aan eerste activeringscriteria is voldaan, waarbij de eerste activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waaraan is voldaan wanneer een intensiteit van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak toeneemt boven een eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde;en de inrichting is ingericht voor het verschaffen van een tweede tactiele uitvoer in reactie op het detecteren dat aan tweede activeringscriteria is voldaan, waarbij de tweede activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waaraan is voldaan wanneer een intensiteit van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak toeneemt boven een tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde, onderscheiden van de eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde;en de werkwijze omvat: het op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface voor instellingen die een of meer stuurobjecten omvat, waarbij de gebruikersinterface voor instellingen is ingericht voor het aanpassen van handelingen van de inrichting die gebruik maken van: de een of meer sensoren die intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak detecteren, en/of de een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren;tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface voor instellingen, detecteren van een invoer voor een eerste stuurobject van de een of meer stuurobjecten;en, 161 in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject: wijzigen van de tweede intensiteit drempelwaarde, en wijzigen van de tweede tactiele uitvoer.
102
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 101, omvattende:het, in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject: wijzigen van de eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde .
103
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 101 tot en met 102, omvattende:het, in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject: wijzigen van de eerste tactiele uitvoer.
104
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 101 tot en met 103, waarbij:in aanvulling op de eerste tactiele uitvoer en de tweede tactiele uitvoer, de inrichting is ingericht voor het verschaffen van andere tactiele uitvoeren in reactie op het detecteren van gebeurtenissen die zijn geassocieerd met beweging van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak;en de werkwijze, in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject, het veranderen van de andere tactiele uitvoeren omvat.
105
Werkwijze volgens een van conclusies 101 tot en met 104, waarbij:de eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde lager is dan de tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde;de tweede activiteitcriteria een op tijd gebasserd criterium omvatten dat afhankelijk is van een 162 tijdstip waarop aan de eerste activiteitcriteria is voldaan;en de werkwijze, in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject, het wijzigen van het op tijd gebaseerde criterium omvat.
106
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 105, waarbij:het op tijd gebaseerde criterium een vertragingstijdspanne omvat die plaats vindt na het tijdstip waarop aan de eerste activeringscriteria was voldaan;en aan het op tijd gebaseerde criterium is voldaan nadat de vertragingstijdspanne is verstreken.
107
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 106, waarbij de tweede activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waaraan is voldaan wanneer de intensiteit van aanraking toeneemt met meer dan een vooraf gedefinieerde hoeveelheid nadat de vertragingsti jdspanne is verstreken.
108
Werkwijze volgens conclusie om het zes, waarbij de tweede activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waar er is voldaan wanneer de intensiteit van de aanraking toeneemt vanaf een intensiteit onder de tweede intensiteitdrempel-waarde naar een intensiteit boven de tweede intensiteit-drempelwaarde nadat de vertragingstijdspanne is verstreken.
109
Werkwijze volgens een van conclusies 105 tot en met 108, waarbij:het op tijd gebaseerde criterium een tijdspanne met verminderde gevoeligheid omvat die optreedt na het tijdstip waarop aan de eerste activeringscriteria is voldaan;en, tijdens de tijdspanne met verminderde gevoeligheid, de tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde wordt verhoogd. 163
110
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 105 tot en met 109, waarbij:de inrichting is ingericht om te reageren op het voldoen aan de eerste activeringscriteria met een eerste type handeling;en de inrichting is ingericht om te reageren op het voldoen aan de tweede activeringscriteria met een tweede type handeling dat verschillend is van het eerste type handeling .
111
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 105 tot en met 110, waarbij:het op tijd gebaseerde criterium er een of meer omvat van: het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak.
112
Werkwijze volgens een van conclusies 105 tot en met 111, waarbij:het op tijd gebaseerde criterium een intensiteitverspringing omvat voor een gebruiker die wordt bepaald op basis van meerdere afzonderlijke invoeren door de gebruiker op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak.
113
Werkwijze volgens conclusie 112, waarbij:de intensiteitverspringing voor de gebruiker wordt bepaald op basis van een of meer van: piekintensiteiten van een eerste vooraf bepaald aantal afzonderlijke klikinvoeren op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak door de gebruiker, en 164 piekintensiteiten van een tweede vooraf bepaald aantal afzonderlijke sleepinvoeren op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak door de gebruiker.
114
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 101 tot en met 113, waarbij het eerste stuurobject een afzonderlijk stuurobject is dat overeenstemt met een bepaalde instelling.
115
Werkwijze volgens een van de conclusies 101 tot en met 113, waarbij het eerste stuurobject een ononderbroken stuurobject is dat overeenstemt met drie of meer instellingen.
116
Elektronische inrichting, omvattend:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak ;een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren;een of meer verwerkingseenheden;geheugen;en een of meer programma's, waarbij de een of meer programma's in het geheugen zijn opgeslagen en zijn ingericht om te worden uitgevoerd door de een of meer verwerkingseenheden, waarbij: de inrichting is ingericht voor het verschaffen van een eerste tactiele uitvoer in reactie op het detecteren dat aan eerste activeringscriteria is voldaan, waarbij de eerste activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waaraan is voldaan wanneer een intensiteit van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak toeneemt boven een eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde;en 165 de inrichting is ingericht voor het verschaffen van een tweede tactiele uitvoer in reactie op het detecteren dat aan tweede activeringscriteria is voldaan, waarbij de tweede activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waaraan is voldaan wanneer een intensiteit van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak toeneemt boven een tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde, onderscheiden van de eerste intensiteit drempelwaarde;en de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten voor het: op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface voor instellingen die een of meer stuurobjecten omvat, waarbij de gebruikersinterface voor instellingen is ingericht voor het aanpassen van handelingen van de inrichting die gebruik maken van: de een of meer sensoren die intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak detecteren, en/of de een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren;tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface voor instellingen, detecteren van een invoer voor een eerste stuurobject van de een of meer stuurobjecten;en, in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject: wijzigen van de tweede intensiteit drempelwaarde, en wijzigen van de tweede tactiele uitvoer.
117
Door een computer leesbaar opslagmedium waarop een of meer programma's zijn opgeslagen, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten, uitgevoerd door een 16 6 elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak, een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteit van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, en een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren, waarbij de inrichting is ingericht voor het:verschaffen van een eerste tactiele uitvoer in reactie op het detecteren dat aan eerste activeringscriteria is voldaan, waarbij de eerste activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waaraan is voldaan wanneer een intensiteit van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak toeneemt boven een eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde;en verschaffen van een tweede tactiele uitvoer in reactie op het detecteren dat aan tweede activeringscriteria is voldaan, waarbij de tweede activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waaraan is voldaan wanneer een intensiteit van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak toeneemt boven een tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde, onderscheiden van de eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde;en de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten, die, wanneer deze worden uitgevoerd door de elektronische inrichting, veroorzaken dat de inrichting: op het beeldscherm een gebruikersinterface voor instellingen vertoont die een of meer stuurobjecten omvat, waarbij de gebruikersinterface voor instellingen is ingericht voor het aanpassen van handelingen van de inrichting die gebruik maken van: de een of meer sensoren die intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak detecteren, en/of de een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren;167 tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface voor instellingen, een invoer detecteert voor een eerste stuurobject van de een of meer stuurobjecten;en, in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject: de tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde wijzigt, en de tweede tactiele uitvoer wijzigt.
118
Elektronische inrichting, omvattende:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak ;een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren, waarbij : de inrichting is ingericht voor het verschaffen van een eerste tactiele uitvoer in reactie op het detecteren dat aan eerste activeringscriteria is voldaan, waarbij de eerste activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waaraan is voldaan wanneer een intensiteit van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak toeneemt boven een eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde;en de inrichting is ingericht voor het verschaffen van een tweede tactiele uitvoer in reactie op het detecteren dat aan tweede activeringscriteria is voldaan, waarbij de tweede activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waaraan is voldaan wanneer een intensiteit van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak toeneemt boven een tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde, onderscheiden van de eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde ;168 middelen voor het op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface voor instellingen die een of meer stuurobjecten omvat, waarbij de gebruikersinterface voor instellingen is ingericht voor het aanpassen van handelingen van de inrichting die gebruik maken van: de een of meer sensoren die intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak detecteren, en/of de een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren;middelen, geactiveerd tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface voor instellingen, voor het detecteren van een invoer voor een eerste stuurobject van de een of meer stuurobjecten;en, middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject, omvattende : middelen voor het wijzigen van de tweede intensiteit drempelwaarde, en middelen voor het wijzigen van de tweede tactiele uitvoer, in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject.
119
Intormatieverwerkingsapparaat voor gebruik in een elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak, een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak en een of meer tactieleuitvoergeneratoren, waarbij:de inrichting is ingericht voor het verschaffen van een eerste tactiele uitvoer in reactie op het detecteren dat aan eerste activeringscriteria is voldaan, waarbij de eerste activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten 169 waaraan is voldaan wanneer een intensiteit van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak toeneemt boven een eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde;en de inrichting is ingericht voor het verschaffen van een tweede tactiele uitvoer in reactie op het detecteren dat aan tweede activeringscriteria is voldaan, waarbij de tweede activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waaraan is voldaan wanneer een intensiteit van een aanraking op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak toeneemt boven een tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde, onderscheiden van de eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde;en de inrichting omvat: middelen voor het op het beeldscherm vertonen van een gebruikersinterface voor instellingen die een of meer stuurobjecten omvat, waarbij de gebruikersinterface voor instellingen is ingericht voor het aanpassen van handelingen van de inrichting die gebruik maken van: de een of meer sensoren die intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak detecteren, en/of de een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren;middelen, geactiveerd tijdens het vertonen van de gebruikersinterface voor instellingen, voor het detecteren van een invoer voor een eerste stuurobject van de een of meer stuurobjecten;en, middelen, geactiveerd in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject, omvattende : middelen voor het wijzigen van de tweede intensiteit drempelwaarde, en 170 middelen voor het wijzigen van de tweede tactiele uitvoer, in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject.
120
Elektronische inrichting, omvattend:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak ;een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren;een of meer verwerkingseenheden;geheugen;en een of meer programma's, waarbij de een of meer programma's in het geheugen zijn opgeslagen en zijn ingericht om te worden uitgevoerd door de een of meer verwerkingseenheden, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten voor het uitvoeren van een van de werkwijze volgens conclusies 101 tot en met 115.
121
Door een computer leesbaar opslagmedium waarop een of meer programma's zijn opgeslagen, waarbij de een of meer programma's instructies omvatten, die, wanneer deze worden uitgevoerd door een elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak, een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteit van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak, en een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren, veroorzaken dat de inrichting een van de werkwijze volgens conclusies 101 tot en met 115 uitvoert.
122
Elektronische inrichting, omvattend:een beeldscherm;een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak;171 een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak ;een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren;middelen voor het uitvoeren van een van de werkwijze volgens conclusies 101 tot en met 115.
123
Informatieverwerkingsapparaat voor gebruik in de elektronische inrichting met een beeldscherm, een aanraakgevoelig oppervlak, een of meer sensoren voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op het aanraakgevoelige oppervlak en een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren, omvattende:middelen voor het uitvoeren van een van de werkwijzen volgens conclusies 101 tot en met 115.
124
Elektronische inrichting omvattende:een beeldschermeenheid ingericht voor het vertonen van een gebruikersinterface;een aanraakgevoelige-oppervlakte-eenheid ingericht voor het detecteren van een aanraking op de aanraakgevoelige-oppervlakte-eenheid;een of meer sensoreenheden ingericht voor het detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid;een of meer tactiele-uitvoereenheden ingericht voor het: verschaffen van een eerste tactiele uitvoer in reactie op het detecteren dat aan eerste activeringscriteria is voldaan, waarbij de eerste activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waren is voldaan wanneer een intensiteit van een aanraking op de aanraakgevoelige-oppervlakte-eenheid toeneemt boven een eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde;172 verschaffen van een tweede tactiele uitvoer in reactie op het detecteren dat aan tweede activeringscriteria is voldaan, waarbij de tweede activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waren is voldaan wanneer een intensiteit van een aanraking op de aanraakgevoelige-oppervlakte-eenheid toeneemt boven een tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde, onderscheiden van de eerste intensiteit drempelwaarde;en een verwerkingseenheid gekoppeld met de beeldschermeenheid, de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid, de een of meer verwerkingseenheden, en een of meer tactiele-uitvoereenheden, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het: activeren van een vertoning op de beeldschermeenheid, van een gebruikersinterface voor instellingen die een of meer stuurobjecten omvat, waarbij de gebruikersinterface voor instellingen is ingericht voor het aanpassen van handelingen van de inrichting die gebruik maken van: door de een of meer sensoren detecteren van intensiteiten van aanrakingen op de aanraakgevoelige-oppervlakte-eenheid, en/of de een of meer tactiele-uitvoergeneratoren;tijdens het activeren van een vertoning van de gebruikersinterface voor instellingen, een invoer detecteren voor een eerste stuurobject uit de een of meer stuurobjecten;en in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject: wijzigen van de tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde ;173 wijzigen van de tweede tactiele uitvoer .
125
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie om het 24, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het:in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject: wijzigen van de eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde .
126
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 124 tot en met 125, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het:in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject: wijzigen van de eerste tactiele uitvoer.
127
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 124 tot en met 126, waarbij de verwerkingseenheid is ingericht voor het:verschaffen van andere tactiele uitvoeren in reactie op het detecteren van gebeurtenissen die zijn geassocieerd met beweging van een aanraking op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid;en in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject, wijzigen van de andere tactiele uitvoeren.
128
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 124 tot en met 127, waarbij:de eerste intensiteitdrempelwaarde lager is dan de tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde;de tweede activeringscriteria een op tijd gebaseerd criterium omvatten dat afhankelijk is van een tijdstip waarop aan de eerste activiteitcriteria is voldaan;en 174 de verwerkingseenheid bovendien is ingericht voor het: in overeenstemming met de gedetecteerde invoer voor het eerste stuurobject, wijzigen van het op tijd gebaseerde criterium.
129
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 12 8, waarbi j:het op tijd gebaseerde criterium een vertragingstijdspanne omvat die optreedt na het moment waarop aan de eerste activeringscriteria was voldaan;en aan het op tijd gebaseerde criterium is voldaan nadat de vertragingstijdspanne is verstreken.
130
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 129, waarbij de tweede activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waaraan is voldaan wanneer de intensiteit van de aanraking toeneemt met meer dan een vooraf gedefinieerde hoeveelheid nadat de vertragingstijdspanne is verstreken.
131
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 129, waarbij de tweede activeringscriteria een criterium omvatten waaraan is voldaan wanneer de intensiteit van de aanraking toeneemt vanaf een intensiteit onder de tweede intensiteitdrempel-waarde naar een intensiteit boven de tweede intensiteit-drempelwaarde nadat de vertragingstijdspanne is verstreken.
132
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van conclusies 128 tot en met 131, waarbij:het op tijd gebaseerde criterium een tijdspanne met verminderde gevoeligheid omvat die optreedt na het tijdstip waarop aan de eerste activeringscriteria is voldaan;en, tijdens de tijdspanne met verminderde intensiteit, de tweede intensiteitdrempelwaarde wordt verhoogd. 175
133
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 128 tot en met 132, waarbij:de inrichting is ingericht om te reageren op het voldoen aan de eerste activeringscriteria met een eerste type handeling;en de inrichting is ingericht om te reageren op het voldoen aan de tweede activeringscriteria met een tweede type handeling die verschilt van het eerste type handeling.
134
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 128 tot en met 133, waarbij:het op tijd gebaseerde criterium er een of meer omvat van: een eerste verspringing die met de tijd toeneemt;en een tweede verspringing die met de tijd verandert op basis van een intensiteit van een aanraking op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid.
135
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 128 tot en met 134, waarbij:het op tijd gebaseerde criterium een intensiteitverspringing voor een gebruiker omvat die is vastgesteld op basis van meerdere afzonderlijke invoeren op de aanraakgevoelig oppervlakte-eenheid door de gebruiker.
136
Elektronische inrichting volgens conclusie 135, waarbij:de intensiteitverspringing voor de gebruiker wordt vastgesteld op basis van de een of meer van: piekintensiteiten van een eerste vooraf bepaald aantal afzonderlijke klikinvoeren op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid door de gebruiker, en 176 piekintensiteiten van een tweede vooraf bepaald aantal afzonderlijke sleepinvoeren op de aanraakgevoelige oppervlakte-eenheid door de gebruiker.
137
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de 5 conclusies 124 tot en met 136, waarbij het eerste stuurobject een afzonderlijk stuurobject is dat overeenstemt met een bepaalde instelling.
138
Elektronische inrichting volgens een van de conclusies 124 tot en met 136, waarbij het eerste stuurobject 10 een continu stuurobject is dat overeenstemt met drie of meer instellingen. Event Sorter 170-. Event Monitor Hit View Determination Module Active Event Recognizer Determination Module Event Dispatcher Module 171 172 173 174 Application 136-1 —x Figure 1B 200 208 I j 208 210 is SIM card slot 212 is headphone jack .^Contact Intensity λ K Sensor(s) 165 ' f Tactile Output ^Generator(s) 167j 203 erometer(s) External Port 124 Figure 2 I Figure 3 126 128 130 132 133 134 136 137 138
139
139
140
140
141
141
142
142
143
143
144
144 147 148 149 149-1 149-2 149-3 149-4 149-5 149-6 150 151 152 380 382 384 386 388 390 157 206 Portable Multifunction Device 100 208 Ί I 208 400 [Speaker 111 Proximity Optical Sensor 164 J I Sensor 166 Current Time 404 ^^0^406 402 Tuesday Photos 428 Messages 424 Calendar 426 Camera 430 Online Video 432 Stocks 434 Clock 440 App Store Maps 436 73® Weather 438 Settings 446 Workout Support 442 iTunes •414 Phone416 Mail418 408 Notes 444 ill Voice Memos 410 □□□ ® ® ® ® ® ® Utilities Browser420 iPod 422 Figure 4A 204· Figure 4B Intensity Figure 4C Intensity A P2 Time Figure 4D Figure 4E 5008-1 -5008-2 5012 -5008-3 5006-1 5006-2 00(3 DEVICES Remote Disc Backup.. SHARED PLACES Desktop ocuments Pictures Cool Stuff Macintosh HD Q. 5004-2 5004-1 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 - ITd - ITl -U- ITo ) Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5A 5006-1 5006-2 5008-1 •5008-2 DEVICES Remote Disc Backup.. SHARED PLACES Desktop ocuments Pictures Cool Stuff 5004-2 5004-1 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 intensity of Contact 5010-A 5008-1 •5008-2 •5008-3 5006-1 5006-2 OO DEVICES Remote Disc Backup.. SHARED PLACES Desktop ocuments Pictures Cool Stuff Macintosh HD Q. 5004-2 5004-1 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5D Display 450 Figure 5E Intensity of Contact 5010-A Display 450 Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5J ITd ITl ITo y of ict A Figure 5L - - ITd I -B- ITo ) intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5M Figure 50 Display 450 - ITd - ITl -LH ITo ) Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5P 5013 ΟΟ Macintosh HD 5052 DEVICES Remote Disc Backup... SHARED PLACES Desktop Documents Pictures Cool Stuff Cool Stuff 002-B IS 5054 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 - - ITd ITl ITo Figure 5V Intensity of Contact 5010-A •5052 Display 450 Figure 5W 00(3 Macintosh HD ffl= DEVICES Remote Disc Backup... SHARED PLACES Desktop Documents Pictures Cool Stuff Cool Stuff 002-B s 5004-5 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 - ITd - ITl - ITo Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5X τ. ΟΟ Macintosh HD DEVICES Remote Disc Backup... SHARED PLACES Desktop Documents Pictures Cool Stuff Cool Stuff 5OO2-B [|·|] 5004-6 5013 s 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 Tactile Output Setting 5060 - ITd ITl ITo ! Intensity of Contact 5010-A Tactile Output Setting First Second Figure 5Y οο Macintosh HD Name Date Modified DEVICES Remote Disc Backup... SHARED PLACES Desktop Documents Pictures Cool Stuff Applications Jan 2, 2015, 4:38 PM cookies.dat Developer j Library Sep 12, 2014, 12:21 PM Aug 11, 2014, 2:24 AM Aug 1, 2014,10:03 AM iS May 25, 2014, 1:15 PM C’*’’! Users Feb 11, 2014, 8:45 AM 002-B 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 Tactile Output Setting 5060 ITd ITl ITo Tactile Output Setting First Second Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5Z ΤΧ Macintosh HD Name Date Modified DEVICES Remote Disc Backup... SHARED PLACES Desktop Documents Pictures Cool Stuff Cool Stuff 002-B f ‘ [ Applications Jan 2, 2015, 4:38 PM cookies.dat Sep 12, 2014, 12:21 PM pZJ Developer Aug 11, 2014, 2:24 AM Library Aug 1, 2014, 10:03 AM S fife System May 25, 2014, 1:15 PM Feb 11,2014, 8:45 AM 5004-6 5013 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 Tactile Output Setting 5060 ------Figure 5AA ITd ITl ITo Tactile Output Setting First Second Intensity of Contact 5010-A ΟΟ€ Macintosh HD D —- . f #·» Q. _7 \ DEVICES Remote Disc Backup... SHARED PLACES Desktop Documents Pictures Cool Stuff Cool Stuff 002-B Name gjg| Applications cookies.dat Developer @3 Library Date Modified Jan 2, 2015, 4:38 PM Sep 12, 2014, 12:21 PM Aug 11,2014, 2:24 AM Aug 1, 2014, 10:03 AM System May 25, 2014, 1:15 PM Feb 11,2014, 8:45 AM 5013 5004-6 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 Tactile Output Setting 5060 - ITd - ITl ITo Tactile Output Setting First Second Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5BB Macintosh HD (Q DEVICES Remote Disc Backup... SHARED PLACES Desktop Documents Pictures Cool Stuff Cool Stuff 002-B 'S 5004-6 5013 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 ITl 5066 Tactile Output Setting 5060 ITo - - ITo Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5CC ~r O© Γ\ Macintosh HD DEVICES Remote Disc Backup... SHARED PLACES Desktop Documents Pictures Cool Stuff IS 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 5068 Tactile Output Setting 5060 ITo ITd ITl Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5DD Region 5070 Region First Second Figure 5EE w OO© Macintosh HD [|«|] DEVICES Remote Disc Backup... SHARED PLACES Desktop Documents Pictures Cool Stuff S 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 5066 5062 ITo Intensity of Contact 5010-A Region 5070 ITd ITl Figure 5FF 5008-K 5008-2 5022 ΟΟ0 DEVICES Remote Dist Macintosh HD 501 Q. Backup.. SHARED PLACES Desktop Documents Pictures Cool Stuff Cool Stuff 002-B IS 5054 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 !To ITo Region 5070 ITl Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5GG 5008-1 5008-2 5022 Developer r-Li Applications cookies.dat DEVICES Remote Disj Backup... SHARED PLACES Desktop Documents Pictures Cool Stuff Users s Library System Notes 2011 Cool Stuff 002-B 5054 5002-A 5076 Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 ITo Region 5070 ITd ITl Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5HH 5008-1 5008-2 5022 Developer DEVICES Remote Dis| Backup... SHARED PLACES Desktop Documents Pictures Cool Stuff Applications cookies.dat Library r - i tteWisB System Users a Notes 2011 Cool Stuff 002-B 5002-A Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 5068 Region 5070 ITo ITd ITl Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5II 5008-4 Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5JJ 5008-4 5022 5068 Region 5070 Intensity of Contact 5010-A ITd ITl ITo Figure 5KK Figure 5LL z s' Trackpad I g L 1 Scroll Zoom More Gestures □ El El □ Tap to click Tap wi’.h one finger Secondary click Press harder with onefinger Look up Tap v.'hh three fingers Three finger drag Move with three fingers Secondary (deep) click pressure (intensity) □ I'M Q Medium □ High Tracking speed 5088 i.Ï Trackpad battery level: ff*?» 79% Set Up Bluetooth Trackpad,,. V. Display 450 J - ITd - ITl -J- ITo ) Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5MM Display 450 Touch-Sensitive Surface 451 - - ITd - - ITl -J- ITo ! Intensity of Contact 5010-A Figure 5NN Figure 500 A)ISU3)U| (β) QOJOJ Figure 5PP Intensity Intensity 5102 és»»» 5104 - K heavy dicker offset Figure 5QQ 600 602 Display, on the display, a user interface of a first software application that includes one or more draggable objects and one or more control objects distinct from the one or more draggable objects While displaying the user interface of the first software application: Figure 6A In accordance with a determination that the contact at the first location satisfies object selection criteria: ® 612 Move the first draggable object to the first control object in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to the first control object I In response to moving the first draggable object to the first control object: I Γ-------------------------I I I | 614 In accordance with a determination that the first software | | I ι application is configured to perform the first predetermined | | I ι operation in response to detecting a contact at the second location | | I j that satisfies the first intensity criteria, visually distinguish the first | | I j control object prior to determining that the contact satisfies the first | | I j intensity criteria ι ι Ι ΞΞΞΞΞΞ£ΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞΞ I 616 Detect a movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface I | to a fourth location that corresponds to a second control object of the one I | or more control objects I I 618 In accordance with a determination that the first software application I I is not configured to perform a predetermined operation in response to I I detecting a contact at the fourth location that satisfies the first intensity I I criteria, forego visually distinguishing the second control object I + 620 In accordance with a determination that the contact at the second location satisfies first intensity criteria, perform a first predetermined operation that corresponds to activation of the first control object ® Figure 6B In accordance with a determination that the contact at the first location satisfies object selection criteria: Θ 620 In accordance with a determination that the contact at the second location satisfies first intensity criteria, perform a first predetermined operation that corresponds to activation of the first control object _____________®_____________ I 622 The user interface includes multiple distinct portions, a first portion of | I the multiple distinct portions includes the first control object, and | I performing the first predetermined operation that corresponds to | I activation of the first control object includes changing a second portion, | I distinct from the first portion, of the multiple distinct portions | 624 The first software application is a calendar application, the user interface of the first software application includes multiple timeperiod user interface elements in the first portion, the one or more draggable objects are one or more calendar entry objects, a respective time-period user interface element of the multiple timeperiod user interface elements corresponds to a predefined unit of time, the second portion of the user interface of the first software application, prior to the determination that the contact at the second location satisfies the first intensity criteria, includes a calendar view that corresponds to a first unit of time, and changing the second portion includes replacing the calendar view that corresponds to a first unit of time with a calendar view that corresponds to a second unit of time that is distinct from the first unit of time 1 626 The first software application is a file system navigation 1 application, the user interface of the first software application 1 includes multiple file view control objects in the first portion, the one ' or more draggable objects are one or more of file icons and/or ' folder icons, a respective file view control object of the multiple file 1 view control objects corresponds to a distinct file view type, the second portion of the user interface, prior to the determination that the contact at the second location satisfies the first intensity criteria, 1 includes a file view of a first file view type, and changing the second 1 portion includes replacing the file view of the first file view type with a file view of a second file view type that is distinct from the file view 1 of the first file view type Figure 6C In accordance with a determination that the contact at the first location satisfies object selection criteria: ® 620 In accordance with a determination that the contact at the second location satisfies first intensity criteria, perform a first predetermined operation that corresponds to activation of the first control object ® Subsequent to moving the first draggable object to the first control object and changing the second portion: I 628 Detect a movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive | | I surface to a third location that corresponds to the changed second | | I portion on the display | | ! ' I------------------------- Ί I j 630 Move the first draggable object to a location, in the changed | 1 I J second portion, that corresponds to the third location on the touch- j 1 I - sensitive surface in accordance with the movement of the contact | 1 I j across the touch-sensitive surface to the third location | ' ! I ! I I-------------------------Ί I I 632 In accordance with a determination that the contact at the third | | location does not satisfy the object selection criteria, drop the first | | I draggable object at the location, in the changed second portion, | | J that corresponds to the third location on the touch-sensitive surface | | I____________________________ 1 634 The object selection criteria include second intensity criteria Figure 6D In accordance with a determination that the contact at the first location satisfies object selection criteria: ( _____________®______________ I 636 Concurrently display an entirety of the user interface of the first software I application with a portion of a user interface of a second software application I adjacent to the user interface of the first software application In accordance with the determination that the contact at the first location satisfies the object selection criteria: I 638 Detect a movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface I to a fifth location that corresponds to the displayed portion of the user I interface of the second software application on the display ______________I______________ I 640 Move the first draggable object to the displayed portion of the user I interface of the second software application in accordance with the I movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to the fifth I location I 642 In response to a determination that the contact at the fifth location I satisfies the first intensity criteria, replace a concurrent display of the I entirety of the user interface of the first software application and the I portion of the user interface of the second software application with a I concurrent display of an entirety of the user interface of the second I software application and a portion of the user interface of the first I software application adjacent to the user interface of the second software I application r--------------------------I 644 In response to a determination that the contact at the fifth location I does not satisfy the first intensity criteria: I determine a time period during which the contact remains at the I fifth location, and I in response to a determination that the time period satisfies time| based activation criteria, replace the concurrent display of the entirety of I the user interface of the first software application and the portion of the I user interface of the second software application with the concurrent I display of an entirety of the user interface of the second software I application and the portion of the user interface of the first software I application adjacent to the user interface of the second software I application Figure 6E 700 702 Display, on the display, a user interface of a first software application + While displaying the user interface of the first software application: ® 704 Detect a first input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface. The contact included in the first input is associated with a respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with a first operation and a second operation. v 710 Detect a second input that includes a contact detected on the touchsensitive surface. The contact included in the second input is associated with the respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with the first operation and the second operation and the second input is different from the first input. Figure 7A While displaying the user interface of the first software application: In response to detecting the second input: Γ-------------------------I 718 In accordance with the determination that the first tactile output I setting is active for the second input, perform the second operation ί without performing the first operation r--------------------------I 720 In accordance with the determination that the first tactile output I setting is active for the second input, forego generation of the first tactile I output Γ-------------------------I 722 In accordance with the determination that the first tactile output I setting is active for the second input, forego generation of a second I tactile output associated with the second operation Figure 7B While displaying the user interface of the first software application: 724 Detect a third input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface. The contact included in the third input is associated with the respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with the first operation and the second operation. The third input is different from the first input and the second input. Γ---------------------------] I 726 The contact in the second input and the contact in the third input are ι I a same contact that is continuously detected on the touch-sensitive | ι surface between the second input and the third input ι I Γ--------------------------I 728 The second input satisfies a first intensity threshold and the contact 1 ι in the third input satisfies a second intensity threshold that is higher than 1 j the first intensity threshold L In response to detecting the third input: Γ--------------------------- 1 I 730 In accordance with a determination that the second tactile output | I setting is active for the third input, perform the second operation in | I conjunction with generating a second tactile output associated with the | I second operation ι I 732 In accordance with a determination that the first tactile output setting I I is active for the third input, forgo generation of the second tactile output I I I r---------------------------1 I 734 In accordance with the determination that the first tactile output I I setting is active, forego repeating the second operation I I______________________________: Figure 7C While displaying the user interface of the first software application: I 736 The second tactile output includes an audible component that is louder | ι than an audible component of the first tactile output ι I 738 The first tactile output has a first tactile output intensity and the second | I tactile output has a second tactile output intensity that is greater than the first | I tactile output intensity ι Figure 7D 800 802 Display, on the display, a user interface that includes: a first region that is configured to initiate a first display operation in response to an input that satisfies first activation criteria and initiate a second display operation in response to an input that satisfies second activation criteria distinct from the first activation criteria, and a second region that is distinct from the first region. The second region is configured to initiate a third display operation in response to an input that satisfies the first activation criteria and the second region is not configured to initiate any display operation in response to an input that satisfies the second activation criteria. Γ----------------------------- ] I 804 The first activation criteria include first intensity criteria i I 806 The second activation criteria include second intensity criteria distinct | I from the first intensity criteria i I 808 The first region is a region that includes a user interface control and the I second region is a region that does not include any user interface control I 810 The user interface includes a plurality of regions that are configured to | I perform display operations in response to inputs that satisfy the second j I activation criteria, and regions of the user interface that are outside of the | I plurality of regions are not configured to perform display operations to inputs | I that satisfy the second activation criteria i While displaying the user interface: 812 Detect a first input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface. The contact included in the first input is associated with the first region of the user interface. Figure 8A While displaying the user interface: Θ Figure 8B While displaying the user interface: Θ In response to detecting the second input: Figure 8C While displaying the user interface: I 838 The user interface includes a third region that is not configured to initiate | I any display operation in response to an input that satisfies first activation | I criteria and is not configured to initiate any display operation in response to an | I input that satisfies second activation criteria distinct from the first activation | I criteria I T f-----------------------------1 I 840 Detect a third input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive I I surface. The contact included in the first input is associated with the third I I region of the user interface. I L J ι-----------------------------1 In response to detecting the third input: I Γ---------------------------1 I I I 842 In accordance with a determination that the third input satisfies the I ' I I first activation criteria, generate a tactile output of the third type I 1 : /TTYTΤΤΓΤΤΤΤΤΤ ί I I 844 In accordance with a determination that the third input satisfies the I I I ' second activation criteria, generate a tactile output of the second type I I Figure 8D While displaying the user interface: Θ I 846 Detect an occurrence of a predefined event associated with the second | I region while the second region is not configured to initiate any display | I operation in response to an input that satisfies the second activation criteria | 848 In response to detecting the occurrence of the predefined event, configure | the second region to initiate a fourth display operation in response to an input | that satisfies the second activation criteria ι While the second region is configured to initiate the fourth display operation in response to an input that satisfies the second activation criteria: Γ---------------------------1 I 850 Detect a fourth input that includes a contact detected on the touch- | I sensitive surface. The contact included in the third input is associated | ι with the second region of the user interface. ι In response to detecting the fourth input: 852 In accordance with a determination that the fourth input satisfies the third activation criteria, perform the third display operation I 854 In accordance with a determination that the fourth input | I satisfies the second activation criteria, perform the fourth display | I operation and concurrently generate a tactile output of the first type | I while performing the second display operation ι ι______________________________ Figure 8E While displaying the user interface: I-----------------------------1 I 856 In response to detecting the first input, in accordance with a determination I I that the first input does not satisfy the first activation criteria and does not I I satisfy the second activation criteria, forgo generating any tactile output I I 858 In response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a | I determination that the second input does not satisfy the first activation criteria | I and does not satisfy the second activation criteria, forgoing generating any | I tactile output I ----------------------------- 1 860 The user interface is generated by a first application running on the device | and the determination as to whether to provide the first tactile output or the j second tactile output when the second set of activation criteria are satisfied is j made by a second application running on the device that is distinct from the j first application I Figure 8F 900 Figure 9A In accordance with the detected input for the first control object: 918 Change the first intensity threshold 920 Change the first tactile output 922 In addition to the first tactile output and the second tactile output, the device is configured to provide other tactile outputs in response to detecting events associated with movement of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface, and the method includes, in accordance with the detected input for the first control object, changing the other tactile outputs 924 The first intensity threshold is lower than the second intensity threshold, the second activation criteria includes a time-based criterion that is dependent upon a time at which the first activation criteria is met, and the method includes, in accordance with the detected input for the first control object, change the time-based criterion 926 The time-based criterion includes a delay time period that occurs after the time at which the first activation criteria were met, and the timebased criterion is met after the delay time period has elapsed. r------------------------I 928 The second activation criteria include a criterion that is met | when the intensity of the contact increases by more than a | predefined amount after the delay time period has elapsed I 930 The second activation criteria include a criterion that is met I when the intensity of the contact increases from an intensity below I the second intensity threshold to an intensity above the second I intensity threshold after the delay time period has elapsed Figure 9B B ------------------------------- 1 932 The time-based criterion includes a reduced-sensitivity time period that occurs I after the time at which the first activation criteria are satisfied, and during the I reduced-sensitivity time period, the second intensity threshold is increased ' I criteria with a first type of operation, and the device is configured to respond to the I satisfaction of the second activation criteria with a second type of operation that is I different from the first type of operation I 924 The first intensity threshold is lower than the second intensity threshold, the I second activation criteria includes a time-based criterion that is dependent upon a I time at which the first activation criteria is met, and the method includes, in I accordance with the detected input for the first control object, change the timeI based criterion I f ----------------------------- 1 1 j 936 The second intensity threshold includes one or more of: a first offset that | 1 I decreases over time;and a second offset that changes over time based on an | I I intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. i 938 The time-based criterion includes an intensity offset for a user that is | determined based on multiple separate inputs on the touch-sensitive surface | by the user I 940 The intensity offset for the user is determined based on one or more | | of: peak intensities of a first predefined number of separate click inputs | | on the touch-sensitive surface by the user, and peak intensities of a j | second predefined number of separate drag inputs on the touch-sensitive | | surface by the user ι i I________________________________ Figure 9C 1000 Processing unit 1008 I Display enablement unit I 1010 ι__________ r~ — — — — — — — I Contact detection unit I 1012 ι__________ I Contact movement I detection unit 1014 I Object movement unit I 1016 ι__________ I Operation performance I unit 1018 I Focus-selector I movement unit 1020 I I Portion changing unit I 1022 I Object distinguishing I unit 1024 I Intensity determination I unit 1026 I Object selection I determination unit 1028 I Time measurement unit I 1030 ι__________ Figure 10 1100 Processing unit 1108 I Display enablement unit I 1110 ι__________ I I Input detection unit 1112 I ι__________ ! Tactile output generation I unit 1114 ι__________ ! Contact detection unit 1116 Operation performance , unit 1118 I Tactile output setting I determination unit 1120 Intensity determination I unit 1122 I Figure 11 1200 Figure 12 1300 Figure 13
145
145

Independent claims145

419 paragraphs, as filed

TECHNICAL FIELD [0001] This relates generally to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces, including but not limited to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces that perform various display operations in conjunction with receiving and/or generating tactile information.

BACKGROUND [0002] The use of touch-sensitive surfaces as input devices for computers and other electronic computing devices has increased significantly in recent years. Exemplary touchsensitive surfaces include touchpads and touch-screen displays. Such surfaces are widely used to perform display operations on a user interface of a display.

[0003] Exemplary display operations include adjusting the position of one or more user interface objects, activating buttons or opening files/applications represented by user interface objects, as well as changing the view of one or more portions of a user interface. Exemplary user interface objects include files, folders, calendar entries, icons, and control elements such as buttons and other graphics. A user will, in some circumstances, need to perform display operations involving user interface objects in a file management program (e.g., Finder from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a calendaring program (e.g., iCal from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), an image management application (e.g., Aperture, iPhoto, or Photos from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a digital content (e.g., videos and music) management application (e.g., iTunes from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a drawing application, a presentation application (e.g., Keynote from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), a word processing application (e.g., Pages from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), or a spreadsheet application (e.g., Numbers from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California).

[0004] But existing methods for performing these display operations are cumbersome and inefficient, and can take multiple steps. For example, if a user wishes to change a view while dragging one or more user interface objects, the user needs to release the one or more user interface objects and change a view of a portion of a user interface, and then pick up the one or more user interface objects again to move the one or more user interface objects to the changed view. This sequence of steps is complex and takes additional time.

SUMMARY [0005] Accordingly, there is a need for electronic devices with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for performing various display operations. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for performing various display operations. In addition, when tactile outputs are used to provide feedback to users, there is a need for methods and interfaces for adjusting tactile outputs. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for providing tactile outputs. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.

[0006] The above deficiencies and other problems associated with user interfaces for electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed devices. In some embodiments, the device is a desktop computer. In some embodiments, the device is portable (e.g., a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handheld device). In some embodiments, the device is a personal electronic device (e.g., a wearable electronic device, such as a watch). In some embodiments, the device has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the device has a touch-sensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or “touch-screen display”). In some embodiments, the device has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory and one or more modules, programs or sets of instructions stored in the memory for performing multiple functions. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the GUI primarily through stylus and/or finger contacts and gestures on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the functions optionally include image editing, drawing, presenting, word processing, spreadsheet making, game playing, telephoning, video conferencing, e-mailing, instant messaging, workout support, digital photographing, digital videoing, web browsing, digital music playing, note taking, and/or digital video playing. Executable instructions for performing these functions are, optionally, included in a nontransitory computer readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.

[0007] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying, on the display, a user interface of a first software application that includes one or more draggable objects and one or more control objects distinct from the one or more draggable objects; and, while displaying the user interface of the first software application: detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a first location while a focus selector is displayed over a first draggable object of the one or more draggable objects displayed on the display; after detecting the contact on the touch-sensitive surface at the first location, detecting a movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to a second location that corresponds to a first control object of the one or more control objects displayed on the display; and, in response to detecting movement of the contact from the first location to the second location, in accordance with a determination that the contact at the first location satisfies object selection criteria: moving the first draggable object to the first control object in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to the first control object; and, in accordance with a determination that the contact at the second location satisfies first intensity criteria, performing a first predetermined operation that corresponds to activation of the first control object.

[0008] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying, on the display, a user interface of a first software application; and, while displaying the user interface of the first software application, detecting a first input that includes a contact detected on the touchsensitive surface. The contact included in the first input is associated with a respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with a first operation and a second operation. The method also includes, in response to detecting the first input: in accordance with a determination that a first tactile output setting is active for the first input, performing the first operation without generating a tactile output; and, in accordance with a determination that a second tactile output setting is active for the first input, forgoing performing the first operation. The method further includes detecting a second input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface. The contact included in the second input is associated with the respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with the first operation and the second operation and the second input is different from the first input. The method includes, in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second tactile output setting is active for the second input, performing the first operation in conjunction with generating a first tactile output associated with the first operation; and, in accordance with a determination that the first tactile output setting is active for the second input, performing the second operation.

[0009] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying, on the display, a user interface that includes: a first region that is configured to initiate a first display operation in response to an input that satisfies first activation criteria and initiate a second display operation in response to an input that satisfies second activation criteria distinct from the first activation criteria; and, a second region that is distinct from the first region and is configured to initiate a third display operation in response to an input that satisfies the first activation criteria and the second region is not configured to initiate any display operation in response to an input that satisfies the second activation criteria. The method also includes, while displaying the user interface, detecting a first input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface. The contact included in the first input is associated with the first region of the user interface. The method further includes, in response to detecting the first input: in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies the first activation criteria, performing the first display operation; and, in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies the second activation criteria, performing the second display operation and concurrently generating a tactile output of a first type while performing the second display operation. The method includes detecting a second input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface. The second input is distinct from the first input and the contact included in the second input is associated with the second region of the user interface. The method also includes, in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second input satisfies the first activation criteria, performing the third display operation; and, in accordance with a determination that the second input satisfies the second activation criteria, generating a tactile output of a second type.

[0010] In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators. The device is configured to provide a first tactile output in response to detecting that first activation criteria have been met, the first activation criteria including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface increases above a first intensity threshold. The device is configured to provide a second tactile output in response to detecting that second activation criteria have been met, the second activation criteria including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface increases above a second intensity threshold, distinct from the first intensity threshold. The method includes displaying, on the display, a settings user interface that includes one or more control objects. The settings user interface is configured to adjust operations of the device that use: the one or more sensors that detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, and/or the one or more tactile output generators. The method also includes, while displaying the settings user interface, detecting an input for a first control object of the one or more control objects; and, in accordance with the detected input for the first control object: changing the second intensity threshold and changing the second tactile output.

[0011] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: enable display of a user interface of a first software application that includes one or more draggable objects and one or more control objects distinct from the one or more draggable objects; and, while enabling display of the user interface of the first software application: detect a contact on the touchsensitive surface unit at a first location while a focus selector is displayed over a first draggable object of the one or more draggable objects displayed on the display unit; after detecting the contact on the touch-sensitive surface at the first location, detect a movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit to a second location that corresponds to a first control object of the one or more control objects displayed on the display unit; and, in response to detecting movement of the contact from the first location to the second location, in accordance with a determination that the contact at the first location satisfies object selection criteria: move the first draggable object to the first control object in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit to the first control object; and, in accordance with a determination that the contact at the second location satisfies first intensity criteria, perform a first predetermined operation that corresponds to activation of the first control object.

[0012] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more sensor units. The processing unit is configured to: enable display of a user interface of a first software application; and, while enabling display of the user interface of the first software application: detect a first input that includes a contact detected on the touch6 sensitive surface unit, wherein the contact included in the first input is associated with a respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with a first operation and a second operation; in response to detecting the first input: in accordance with a determination that a first tactile output setting is active for the first input, perform the first operation without generating a tactile output; and in accordance with a determination that a second tactile output setting is active for the first input, forgo performing the first operation. The processing unit is also configured to: detect a second input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface unit, wherein the contact included in the second input is associated with the respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with the first operation and the second operation and the second input is different from the first input; and, in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second tactile output setting is active for the second input, perform the first operation in conjunction with generating a first tactile output associated with the first operation; and, in accordance with a determination that the first tactile output setting is active for the second input, perform the second operation.

[0013] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit; one or more tactile output units; and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, the one or more sensor units, and the one or more tactile output units. The processing unit is configured to: enable display of a user interface that includes: a first region that is configured to initiate a first display operation in response to an input that satisfies first activation criteria and initiate a second display operation in response to an input that satisfies second activation criteria distinct from the first activation criteria; and a second region that is distinct from the first region, wherein the second region is configured to initiate a third display operation in response to an input that satisfies the first activation criteria and the second region is not configured to initiate any display operation in response to an input that satisfies the second activation criteria; and, while enabling display of the user interface: detect a first input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface unit, wherein the contact included in the first input is associated with the first region of the user interface; and, in response to detecting the first input: in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies the first activation criteria, perform the first display operation; and, in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies the second activation criteria, perform the second display operation and concurrently generate a tactile output of a first type while performing the second display operation; detect a second input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the second input is distinct from the first input and the contact included in the second input is associated with the second region of the user interface; and, in response to detecting the second input: in accordance with a determination that the second input satisfies the first activation criteria, perform the third display operation; and, in accordance with a determination that the second input satisfies the second activation criteria, generate a tactile output of a second type.

[0014] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit to receive contacts, one or more sensor units to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit, one or more tactile output generators, and a processing unit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, the one or more sensor units, and the one or more tactile output units. The one or more tactile output units are configured to: provide a first tactile output in response to detecting that first activation criteria have been met, the first activation criteria including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit increases above a first intensity threshold; and provide a second tactile output in response to detecting that second activation criteria have been met, the second activation criteria including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit increases above a second intensity threshold, distinct from the first intensity threshold. The processing unit is configured to: enable display, of a settings user interface that includes one or more control objects, wherein the settings user interface is configured to adjust operations of the device that use: the one or more sensors that detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit, and/or the one or more tactile output generators. The processing unit is also configured to, while enabling display of the settings user interface, detect an input for a first control object of the one or more control objects; and, in accordance with the detected input for the first control object: change the second intensity threshold; and change the second tactile output.

[0015] In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, one or more processors, memory, and one or more programs; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors and the one or more programs include instructions for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a computer readable storage medium has stored therein instructions which when executed by an electronic device with a display, a touchsensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform or cause performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, a graphical user interface on an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors to execute one or more programs stored in the memory includes one or more of the elements displayed in any of the methods described herein, which are updated in response to inputs, as described in any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes: a display, a touchsensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface; and means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an information processing apparatus, for use in an electronic device with a display and a touchsensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, includes means for performing or causing performance of the operations of any of the methods described herein.

[0016] Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for performing various display operations in conjunction with receiving and/or generating tactile information, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for performing various display operations in conjunction with receiving and/or generating tactile information.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS [0017] For a better understanding of the various described embodiments, reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, in conjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numerals refer to corresponding parts throughout the figures.

[0018] Figure 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.

[0019] Figure IB is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments.

[0020] Figure 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments.

[0021] Figure 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.

[0022] Figure 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.

[0023] Figure 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments.

[0024] Figures 4C-4E illustrate exemplary dynamic intensity thresholds in accordance with some embodiments.

[0025] Figures 5A-5NN illustrate exemplary user interfaces for processing touch inputs in accordance with some embodiments.

[0026] Figures 5OO-5QQ are exemplary intensity diagrams in accordance with some embodiments.

[0027] Figures 6A-6E are flow diagrams illustrating a method of enabling interaction with one or more control objects in a user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. [0028] Figures 7A-7D are flow diagrams illustrating a method of performing operations in conjunction with generating tactile outputs, in accordance with some embodiments.

[0029] Figures 8A-8F are flow diagrams illustrating a method of providing tactile outputs based on one or more regions of a user interface in accordance with some embodiments.

[0030] Figures 9A-9C are flow diagrams illustrating a method of performing operations in conjunction with configuring tactile outputs in accordance with some embodiments.

[0031] Figures 10-13 are functional block diagrams of electronic devices in accordance with some embodiments.

DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS [0032] Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces with draggable user interface objects (e.g., files, folders, calendar entries, and icons) and control user interface objects (e.g., buttons, switches, sliders, and other controls). When a user selects a calendar entry for today in a month view and moves it to a different date and time, the user may need to drag the calendar entry to the different date and drop the calendar entry, switch to a day view, and then drag the calendar entry again and drop it on a new time. Alternatively, the user may open the calendar entry and manually type in the new date and time. In the embodiments described below, an improved method for performing operations (e.g., moving a calendar entry) is achieved by displaying a user interface that includes a draggable object (e.g., a calendar entry) and control objects (e.g., view buttons). While the draggable object is being dragged, one of the control objects is activated to change the view (e.g., from the month view to the day view), and the draggable object is dropped into a user-specified location (e.g., a user-specified time slot). This method allows for interaction with control objects while dragging a draggable object, thereby eliminating the need for extra, separate steps for interacting with control objects. This method, which uses a single contact to both drag an object and interact with a control object, is optionally be used in other applications as well. [0033] Below, Figures 1A-1B, 2, and 3 provide a description of exemplary devices.

Figures 4A-4B, and 5A-5NN, illustrate exemplary user interfaces for processing touch inputs. Figures 5OO-5QQ are exemplary intensity diagrams. Figures 6A-6E illustrate a flow diagram of a method of enabling interaction with one or more control objects in a user interface. Figures 7A-7D illustrate a flow diagram of a method of performing operations in conjunction with generating tactile outputs. Figures 8A-8F illustrate a flow diagram of a method of providing tactile outputs based on one or more regions of a user interface. Figures 9A-9C illustrate a flow diagram of a method of configuring tactile outputs and activation criteria. The user interfaces in Figures 5A-5NN and the intensity diagrams in Figures 5005QQ are used to illustrate the processes in Figures 6A-6E, 7A-7D, 8A-8F, and 9A-9C.

EXEMPLARY DEVICES [0034] Reference wih now be made in detail to embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In the following detailed description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the various described embodiments. However, it wih be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that the various described embodiments may be practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components, circuits, and networks have not been described in detail so as not to unnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments.

[0035] It wih also be understood that, although the terms first, second, etc. are, in some instances, used herein to describe various elements, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another.

For example, a first contact could be termed a second contact, and, similarly, a second contact could be termed a first contact, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. The first contact and the second contact are both contacts, but they are not the same contact, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.

[0036] The terminology used in the description of the various described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will be further understood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and/or “comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof.

[0037] As used herein, the term “if’ is, optionally, construed to mean “when” or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,” depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or “if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construed to mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upon detecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting [the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.

[0038] Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as a mobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch-screen displays and/or touchpads), are, optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but is a desktop computer with a touchsensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screen display and/or a touchpad).

[0039] In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should be understood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, a mouse and/or a joystick.

[0040] The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: a note taking application, a drawing application, a presentation application, a word processing application, a website creation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephone application, a video conferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messaging application, a workout support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.

[0041] The various applications that are executed on the device optionally use at least one common physical user-interface device, such as the touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the next and/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physical architecture (such as the touchsensitive surface) of the device optionally supports the variety of applications with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.

[0042] Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices with touchsensitive displays. Figure 1A is a block diagram illustrating portable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touchsensitive display system 112 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience, and is sometimes simply called a touch-sensitive display. Device 100 includes memory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer readable storage mediums), memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, peripherals interface 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, input/output (I/O) subsystem 106, other input or control devices 116, and external port 124. Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164. Device 100 optionally includes one or more intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100). Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300). These components optionally communicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 103.

[0043] As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component (e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relative to a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user with the user’s sense of touch. For example, in situations where the device or the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a user that is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of a user’s hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or the component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally, interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physical actuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensation such as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement of a physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user’s movements. As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally, interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a user will be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user, there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a large majority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “up click,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that will generate the described sensory perception for a typical (or average) user.

[0044] It should be appreciated that device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in Figure 1A are implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.

[0045] Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access to memory 102 by other components of device 100, such as CPU(s) 120 and the peripherals interface 118, is, optionally, controlled by memory controller 122.

[0046] Peripherals interface 118 can be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU(s) 120 and memory 102. The one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 102 to perform various functions for device 100 and to process data.

[0047] In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118, CPU(s) 120, and memory controller 122 are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104. In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implemented on separate chips.

[0048] RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, also called electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communications networks and other communications devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as the Internet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranet and/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies, including but not limited to Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), near field communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access (W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.1 lac, IEEE 802.1 lax, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.1 lg and/or IEEE 802.11η), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol for e-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document.

[0049] Audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide an audio interface between a user and device 100. Audio circuitry 110 receives audio data from peripherals interface 118, converts the audio data to an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 111. Speaker 111 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted by microphone 113 from sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data to peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally, retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212, Figure 2). The headset jack provides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and removable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headset with both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input (e.g., a microphone).

[0050] I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device 100, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 and other input or control devices 116, with peripherals interface 118. I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes display controller 156, optical sensor controller 158, intensity sensor controller 159, haptic feedback controller 161, and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input or control devices 116. The other input or control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s) 160 are, optionally, coupled with any (or none) of the following: a keyboard, infrared port, USB port, stylus, and/or a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 208, Figure 2) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of speaker 111 and/or microphone 113. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (e.g., 206, Figure 2).

[0051] Touch-sensitive display system 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and a user. Display controller 156 receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch-sensitive display system 112. Touch-sensitive display system 112 displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to user-interface objects. As used herein, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object (e.g., a graphical user interface object that is configured to respond to inputs directed toward the graphical user interface object). Examples of user-interactive graphical user interface objects include, without limitation, a button, slider, icon, selectable menu item, switch, hyperlink, or other user interface control.

[0052] Touch-sensitive display system 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor or set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touchsensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions in memory 102) detect contact (and any movement or breaking of the contact) on touch-sensitive display system 112 and converts the detected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) that are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112. In an exemplary embodiment, a point of contact between touch-sensitive display system 112 and the user corresponds to a finger of the user or a stylus.

[0053] Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 optionally detect contact and any movement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with touch-sensitive display system 112. In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.

[0054] Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally has a video resolution in excess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen video resolution is in excess of 400 dpi (e.g., 500 dpi, 800 dpi, or greater). The user optionally makes contact with touch-sensitive display system 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger, and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the rough finger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command for performing the actions desired by the user.

[0055] In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch-sensitive display system 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.

[0056] Device 100 also includes power system 162 for powering the various components. Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a lightemitting diode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation, management and distribution of power in portable devices.

[0057] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164. Figure

1A shows an optical sensor coupled with optical sensor controller 158 in EO subsystem 106. Optical sensor(s) 164 optionally include charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) photo transistors. Optical sensor(s) 164 receive light from the environment, projected through one or more lens, and converts the light to data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), optical sensor(s) 164 optionally capture still images and/or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch-sensitive display system 112 on the front of the device, so that the touch screen is enabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, another optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user's image is obtained (e.g., for selfies, for videoconferencing while the user views the other video conference participants on the touch screen, etc.).

[0058] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165.

Figure 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled with intensity sensor controller 159 in EO subsystem 106. Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 receive contact intensity information (e.g., pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch-screen display system 112 which is located on the front of device 100.

[0059] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166.

Figure 1A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled with peripherals interface 118. Alternately, proximity sensor 166 is coupled with input controller 160 in FO subsystem 106. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch-sensitive display system 112 when the multifunction device is placed near the user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).

[0060] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 167.

Figure 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled with haptic feedback controller 161 in FO subsystem 106. Tactile output generator(s) 167 optionally include one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor, solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostatic actuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., a component that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Tactile output generator(s) 167 receive tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 133 and generates tactile outputs on device 100 that are capable of being sensed by a user of device 100. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112) and, optionally, generates a tactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., in/out of a surface of device 100) or laterally (e.g., back and forth in the same plane as a surface of device 100). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch-sensitive display system 112, which is located on the front of device 100.

[0061] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168. Figure

1A shows accelerometer 168 coupled with peripherals interface 118. Alternately, accelerometer 168 is, optionally, coupled with an input controller 160 in FO subsystem 106. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch-screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. Device 100 optionally includes, in addition to accelerometer(s) 168, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of device 100.

[0062] In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126, communication module (or set of instructions) 128, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 130, graphics module (or set of instructions) 132, haptic feedback module (or set of instructions) 133, text input module (or set of instructions) 134, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions) 135, and applications (or sets of instructions) 136. Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 102 stores device/global internal state 157, as shown in Figures 1A and 3. Device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of: active application state, indicating which applications, if any, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications, views or other information occupy various regions of touch-sensitive display system 112; sensor state, including information obtained from the device’s various sensors and other input or control devices 116; and location and/or positional information concerning the device’s location and/or attitude.

[0063] Operating system 126 (e.g., iOS, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X,

WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.

[0064] Communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devices over one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for handling data received by RF circuitry 108 and/or external port 124. External port 124 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California. In some embodiments, the external port is a Lightning connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the Lightning connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California.

[0065] Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with touch-sensitive display system 112 (in conjunction with display controller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). Contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to detection of contact (e.g., by a finger or by a stylus), such as determining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-down event), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact), determining if there is movement of the contact and tracking the movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact). Contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which is represented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determining speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or an acceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts (e.g., one finger contacts or stylus contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch’Vmultiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad.

[0066] Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user.

Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities of detected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event at the same position (or substantially the same position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of an icon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touchsensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequently followed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event. Similarly, tap, swipe, drag, and other gestures are optionally detected for a stylus by detecting a particular contact pattern for the stylus.

[0067] Graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on touch-sensitive display system 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast or other visual property) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term “graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including without limitation text, web pages, icons (such as user-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations and the like.

[0068] In some embodiments, graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives, from applications etc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with, if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and then generates screen image data to output to display controller 156.

[0069] Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 167 to produce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interactions with device 100.

[0070] Text input module 134, which is, optionally, a component of graphics module

132, provides soft keyboards for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 137, e-mail 140, IM 141, browser 147, and any other application that needs text input).

[0071] GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 138 for use in location-based dialing, to camera 143 as picture/video metadata, and to applications that provide locationbased services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).

[0072] Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:

contacts module 137 (sometimes called an address book or contact list);

telephone module 138;

video conferencing module 139;

e-mail client module 140;

instant messaging (IM) module 141;

workout support module 142;

camera module 143 for still and/or video images;

image management module 144;

browser module 147;

calendar module 148;

widget modules 149, which optionally include one or more of: weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created widgets 149-6;

• widget creator module 150 for making user-created widgets 149-6;

• search module 151;

• video and music player module 152, which is, optionally, made up of a video player module and a music player module;

• notes module 153;

• map module 154; and/or • online video module 155.

[0073] Examples of other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.

[0074] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, contacts module 137 includes executable instructions to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in application internal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370), including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es), physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating an image with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephone numbers and/or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications by telephone 138, video conference 139, e-mail 140, or IM 141; and so forth.

[0075] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, telephone module 138 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in address book 137, modify a telephone number that has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct a conversation and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is completed. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally uses any of a plurality of communications standards, protocols and technologies.

[0076] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, optical sensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, contact list 137, and telephone module 138, videoconferencing module 139 includes executable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.

[0077] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, e-mail client module 140 includes executable instructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module 144, e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mails with still or video images taken with camera module 143.

[0078] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, the instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions to enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, to transmit a respective instant message (for example, using a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol for telephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, Apple Push Notification Service (APNs) or IMPS for Internet-based instant messages), to receive instant messages and to view received instant messages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as are supported in a MMS and/or an Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to both telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, APNs, or IMPS).

[0079] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134,

GPS module 135, map module 154, and music player module 146, workout support module 142 includes executable instructions to create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burning goals); communicate with workout sensors (in sports devices and smart watches); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor a workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store and transmit workout data.

[0080] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, optical sensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and image management module 144, camera module 143 includes executable instructions to capture still images or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory 102, modify characteristics of a still image or video, and/or delete a still image or video from memory 102.

[0081] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and camera module 143, image management module 144 includes executable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show or album), and store still and/or video images.

[0082] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, browser module 147 includes executable instructions to browse the Internet in accordance with user instructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages. [0083] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create, display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars (e.g., calendar entries, to do lists, etc.) in accordance with user instructions. [0084] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget modules 149 are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by a user (e.g., weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) or created by the user (e.g., user-created widget 149-6). In some embodiments, a widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).

[0085] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, the widget creator module 150 includes executable instructions to create widgets (e.g., turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).

[0086] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, search module 151 includes executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 102 that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.

[0087] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111,

RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147, video and music player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow the user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and executable instructions to display, present or otherwise play back videos (e.g., on touchsensitive display system 112, or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).

[0088] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, notes module 153 includes executable instructions to create and manage notes, to do lists, and the like in accordance with user instructions.

[0089] In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, and browser module 147, map module 154 includes executable instructions to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions; data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.

[0090] In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 includes executable instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touch screen 112, or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124), send an e-mail with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141, rather than e-mail client module 140, is used to send a link to a particular online video.

[0091] Each of the above identified modules and applications correspond to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions described above and the methods described in this application (e.g., the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[0092] In some embodiments, device 100 is a device where operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or a touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, and the like) on device 100 is, optionally, reduced.

[0093] The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface that is displayed on device 100. In such embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad. [0094] Figure IB is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event handling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (in Figures 1A) or 370 (Figure 3) includes event sorter 170 (e.g., in operating system 126) and a respective application 136-1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 136, 137-155, 380390).

[0095] Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines the application

136-1 and application view 191 of application 136-1 to which to deliver the event information. Event sorter 170 includes event monitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174.

In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes application internal state 192, which indicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 157 is used by event sorter 170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event sorter 170 to determine application views 191 to which to deliver event information.

[0096] In some embodiments, application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of: resume information to be used when application 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state information that indicates information being displayed or that is ready for display by application 136-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back to a prior state or view of application 136-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.

[0097] Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface 118.

Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., a user touch on touchsensitive display system 112, as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 106 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor 166, accelerometer(s) 168, and/or microphone 113 (through audio circuitry 110).

Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from I/O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display system 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.

[0098] In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripheral interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).

[0099] In some embodiments, event sorter 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 173.

[00100] Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views, when touchsensitive display system 112 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.

[00101] Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes herein called application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example, the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally, called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as proper inputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hit view of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.

[00102] Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which should handle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowest level view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (i.e., the first sub-event in the sequence of subevents that form an event or potential event). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determination module, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.

[00103] Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, and therefore determines that all actively involved views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touch sub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with one particular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain as actively involved views.

[00104] Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments including active event recognizer determination module 173, event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the event information, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver module 182.

[00105] In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event sorter 170. Alternatively, application 136-1 includes event sorter 170. In yet other embodiments, event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module, or a part of another module stored in memory 102, such as contact/motion module 130.

[00106] In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events that occur within a respective view of the application’s user interface. Each application view 191 of the application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers 180. Typically, a respective application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers 180. In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respective event handler 190 includes one or more of: data updater 176, object updater 177, GUI updater 178, and/or event data 179 received from event sorter 170. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176, object updater 177 or GUI updater 178 to update the application internal state 192. Alternatively, one or more of the application views 191 includes one or more respective event handlers 190. Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a respective application view 191.

[00107] A respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g., event data

179) from event sorter 170, and identifies an event from the event information. Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 and event comparator 184. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of: metadata 183, and event delivery instructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event delivery instructions).

[00108] Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 170. The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as location of the sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the event information optionally also includes speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation (also called device attitude) of the device.

[00109] Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines an event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event or sub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes event definitions 186. Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events (e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1 (187-1), event 2 (1872), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events in an event 187 include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touch movement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, the definition for event 1 (187-1) is a double tap on a displayed object. The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second lift-off (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 (187-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, for example, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touchsensitive display system 112, and lift-off of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190.

[00110] In some embodiments, event definition 187 includes a definition of an event for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user-interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user-interface objects are displayed on touchsensitive display system 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display system 112, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user-interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hit test.

[00111] In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event 187 also includes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events does or does not correspond to the event recognizer’s event type.

[00112] When a respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series of subevents do not match any of the events in event definitions 186, the respective event recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, event failed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue to track and process subevents of an ongoing touch-based gesture.

[00113] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 includes metadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to actively involved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in the view or programmatic hierarchy. [00114] In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 activates event handler 190 associated with an event when one or more particular sub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to event handler 190. Activating an event handler 190 is distinct from sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process. [00115] In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver event information to event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlers associated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved views receive the event information and perform a predetermined process.

[00116] In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136-1. For example, data updater 176 updates the telephone number used in contacts module 137, or stores a video file used in video player module 145. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136-1. For example, object updater 176 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of a user-interface object. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 132 for display on a touchsensitive display.

[00117] In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 includes or has access to data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In some embodiments, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of a respective application 136-1 or application view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.

[00118] It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding event handling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies to other forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 100 with input-devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinated with single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc., on touch-pads; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilized as inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to be recognized.

[00119] Figure 2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112, Figure 1A) in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200. In this embodiment, as well as others described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments, selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, right to left, upward and/or downward) and/or a rolling of a finger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) that has made contact with device 100. In some implementations or circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.

[00120] Device 100 optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as “home” or menu button 204. As described previously, menu button 204 is, optionally, used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are, optionally executed on device

100. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a

GUI displayed on the touch-screen display.

[00121] In some embodiments, device 100 includes the touch-screen display, menu button 204, push button 206 for powering the device on/off and locking the device, volume adjustment button(s) 208, Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card slot 210, head set jack 212, and docking/charging external port 124. Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/off on the device by depressing the button and holding the button in the depressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by depressing the button and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlock process. In some embodiments, device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions through microphone 113. Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive display system 112 and/or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 100.

[00122] Figure 3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a child’s learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPU’s) 310, one or more network or other communications interfaces 360, memory 370, and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communication buses 320 optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects and controls communications between system components. Device 300 includes input/output (I/O) interface 330 comprising display 340, which is typically a touch-screen display. I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355, tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to Figure 1A), sensors 359 (e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contact intensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference to Figure 1A). Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM,

DDR RAM or other random access solid state memory devices; and optionally includes nonvolatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices remotely located from CPU(s) 310. In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (Figure 1A), or a subset thereof. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100. For example, memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawing module 380, presentation module 382, word processing module 384, website creation module 386, disk authoring module 388, and/or spreadsheet module 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (Figure 1A) optionally does not store these modules. [00123] Each of the above identified elements in Figure 3 are, optionally, stored in one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of the above identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions for performing a function described above. The above identified modules or programs (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

[00124] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (UI) that are, optionally, implemented on portable multifunction device 100.

[00125] Figure 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented on device 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:

• Signal strength indicator(s) 402 for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;

• Time 404;

• Bluetooth indicator 405;

• Battery status indicator 406;

• Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as:

o Icon 416 for telephone module 138, labeled “Phone,” which optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages; o Icon 418 for e-mail client module 140, labeled “Mail,” which optionally includes an indicator 410 of the number of unread e-mails;

o Icon 420 for browser module 147, labeled “Browser;” and o Icon 422 for video and music player module 152, also referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 152, labeled “iPod;” and • Icons for other applications, such as:

o Icon 424 for IM module 141, labeled “Messages;” o Icon 426 for calendar module 148, labeled “Calendar;” o Icon 428 for image management module 144, labeled “Photos;” o Icon 430 for camera module 143, labeled “Camera;” o Icon 432 for online video module 155, labeled “Online Video;” o Icon 434 for stocks widget 149-2, labeled “Stocks;” o Icon 436 for map module 154, labeled “Map;” o Icon 438 for weather widget 149-1, labeled “Weather;” o Icon 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4, labeled “Clock;” o Icon 442 for workout support module 142, labeled “Workout Support;” o Icon 444 for notes module 153, labeled “Notes;” and o Icon 446 for a settings application or module, which provides access to settings for device 100 and its various applications 136.

[00126] It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in Figure 4A are merely exemplary. For example, in some embodiments, icon 422 for video and music player module 152 is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Other labels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In some embodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a name of an application corresponding to the respective application icon. In some embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinct from a name of an application corresponding to the particular application icon.

[00127] Figure 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 355, Figure 3) that is separate from the display 450. Device 300 also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 357) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators 359 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300.

[00128] Figure 4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet or touchpad 355, Figure 3) that is separate from the display 450. Many of the examples that follow will be given with reference to a device that detects inputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in Figure 4B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in Figure 4B) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in Figure 4B) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in Figure 4B) on the display (e.g., 450). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in Figure 4B) with the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display (e.g., in Figure 4B, 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470). In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 460 and 462, and movements thereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in Figure 4B) are used by the device to manipulate the user interface on the display (e.g., 450 in Figure 4B) of the multifunction device when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other user interfaces described herein.

[00129] Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures, etc.), it should be understood that, in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with input from another input device (e.g., a mouse based input or a stylus input).

For example, a drag gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click (e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor along the path of the drag gesture (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). As another example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture (e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detect the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneously detected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are, optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are, optionally, used simultaneously.

[00130] As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that indicates a current part of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 355 in Figure 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in Figure 4B) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations that include a touch-screen display (e.g., touchsensitive display system 112 in Figure 1A or the touch screen in Figure 4A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch-screen display, a detected contact on the touch-screen acts as a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by the contact) is detected on the touch-screen display at a location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch-screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); in these implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance with movement of focus between different regions of the user interface. Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, the focus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on a touch-screen display) that is controlled by the user so as to communicate the user’s intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interface with which the user is intending to interact). For example, the location of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) over a respective button while a press input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).

[00131] As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact or a stylus contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of a contact has a range of values that includes at least four distinct values and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., at least 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (or measured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average or a sum) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is, optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touchsensitive surface and/or changes thereto, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally, used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the substitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitute measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a user input allows for user access to additional device functionality that may otherwise not be readily accessible by the user on a reduced-size device with limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on a touch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via a touch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button).

[00132] In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” on an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of device 100). For example, a mouse “click” threshold of a trackpad or touch-screen display can be set to any of a large range of predefined thresholds values without changing the trackpad or touch-screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations a user of the device is provided with software settings for adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click “intensity” parameter).

[00133] As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a characteristic of the contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number of intensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during a predetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting the contact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionally based on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of the intensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of the intensities of the contact, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., when the characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds may include a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contact with a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first threshold results in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed the second intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contact with a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second intensity threshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, a comparison between the characteristic intensity and one or more intensity thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform one or more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective option or forgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used to determine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.

[00134] In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity. For example, a touch-sensitive surface may receive a continuous swipe contact transitioning from a start location and reaching an end location (e.g., a drag gesture), at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location may be based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact, and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm may be applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithms eliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact for purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.

[00135] The user interface figures described herein (e.g., Figures 5A-5NN) optionally include various intensity diagrams that show the current intensity of the contact on the touchsensitive surface relative to one or more intensity thresholds (e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold ITo, a light press intensity threshold ITl, a deep press intensity threshold ITd (e.g., that is at least initially higher than II), and/or one or more other intensity thresholds (e.g., an intensity threshold Ih that is lower than II)). This intensity diagram is typically not part of the displayed user interface, but is provided to aid in the interpretation of the figures.

In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operations that are different from operations typically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold ITo below which the contact is no longer detected), the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operation associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface figures.

[00136] In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria based on the contact intensity during the input. For example, for some “light press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a first intensity threshold during the input triggers a first response. In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria that include both the contact intensity during the input and time-based criteria. For example, for some “deep press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding a second intensity threshold during the input, greater than the first intensity threshold for a light press, triggers a second response only if a delay time has elapsed between meeting the first intensity threshold and meeting the second intensity threshold. This delay time is typically less than 200 ms in duration (e.g., 40, 100, or 120 ms, depending on the magnitude of the second intensity threshold, with the delay time increasing as the second intensity threshold increases). This delay time helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. As another example, for some “deep press” inputs, there is a reduced-sensitivity time period that occurs after the time at which the first intensity threshold is met. During the reduced-sensitivity time period, the second intensity threshold is increased. This temporary increase in the second intensity threshold also helps to avoid accidental deep press inputs. For other deep press inputs, the response to detection of a deep press input does not depend on time-based criteria.

[00137] In some embodiments, one or more of the input intensity thresholds and/or the corresponding outputs vary based on one or more factors, such as user settings, contact motion, input timing, application running, rate at which the intensity is applied, number of concurrent inputs, user history, environmental factors (e.g., ambient noise), focus selector position, and the like. Exemplary factors are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial Nos. 14/399,606 and 14/624,296, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entireties. [00138] For example, Figure 4C illustrates a dynamic intensity threshold 480 that changes over time based in part on the intensity of touch input 476 over time. Dynamic intensity threshold 480 is a sum of two components, first component 474 that decays over time after a predefined delay time pi from when touch input 476 is initially detected, and second component 478 that trails the intensity of touch input 476 over time. The initial high intensity threshold of first component 474 reduces accidental triggering of a “deep press” response, while still allowing an immediate “deep press” response if touch input 476 provides sufficient intensity. Second component 478 reduces unintentional triggering of a “deep press” response by gradual intensity fluctuations of in a touch input. In some embodiments, when touch input 476 satisfies dynamic intensity threshold 480 (e.g., at point 481 in Figure 4C), the “deep press” response is triggered.

[00139] Figure 4D illustrates another dynamic intensity threshold 486 (e.g., intensity threshold Id). Figure 4D also illustrates two other intensity thresholds: a first intensity threshold Ih and a second intensity threshold II. In Figure 4D, although touch input 484 satisfies the first intensity threshold Ih and the second intensity threshold II prior to time p2, no response is provided until delay time p2 has elapsed at time 482. Also in Figure 4D, dynamic intensity threshold 486 decays over time, with the decay starting at time 488 after a predefined delay time pi has elapsed from time 482 (when the response associated with the second intensity threshold II was triggered). This type of dynamic intensity threshold reduces accidental triggering of a response associated with the dynamic intensity threshold Id immediately after, or concurrently with, triggering a response associated with a lower intensity threshold, such as the first intensity threshold Ih or the second intensity threshold II. [00140] Figure 4E illustrate yet another dynamic intensity threshold 492 (e.g., intensity threshold Id). In Figure 4E, a response associated with the intensity threshold II is triggered after the delay time p2 has elapsed from when touch input 490 is initially detected.

Concurrently, dynamic intensity threshold 492 decays after the predefined delay time pi has elapsed from when touch input 490 is initially detected. So a decrease in intensity of touch input 490 after triggering the response associated with the intensity threshold II, followed by an increase in the intensity of touch input 490, without releasing touch input 490, can trigger a response associated with the intensity threshold Id (e.g., at time 494) even when the intensity of touch input 490 is below another intensity threshold, for example, the intensity threshold II. See Figures 5OO-5QQ and the discussion thereof below for additional description of dynamic intensity thresholds and their uses.

[00141] An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold ITl to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold ITl and the deep press intensity threshold ITd is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold ITd to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold ITd is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold ITo to an intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold ITo and the light press intensity threshold ITl is sometimes referred to as detecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detection intensity threshold ITo to an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold ITo is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments ITo is zero. In some embodiments, ITo is greater than zero. In some illustrations a shaded circle or oval is used to represent intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some illustrations, a circle or oval without shading is used represent a respective contact on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying the intensity of the respective contact.

[00142] In some embodiments, described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respective press input or in response to detecting the respective press input performed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), where the respective press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on a “down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the press-input threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input).

[00143] In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationship to the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensity threshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensity threshold, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increase in intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact, depending on the circumstances).

[00144] For ease of explanation, the description of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press-input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are, optionally, triggered in response to detecting: an increase in intensity of a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase in intensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, a decrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, or a decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-input intensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, the operation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decrease in intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold. As described above, in some embodiments, the triggering of these responses also depends on time-based criteria being met (e.g., a delay time has elapsed between a first intensity threshold being met and a second intensity threshold being met).

USER INTERFACES AND ASSOCIATED PROCESSES [00145] Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) and associated processes that may be implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device 100 or device 300, with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface.

[00146] Figures 5A-5NN illustrate exemplary user interfaces for processing touch inputs in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 6A-6E, 7A-7D, 8A-8F, and 9A-9C. Although some of the examples which follow will be given with reference to inputs on a touch-sensitive surface 451 that is separate from the display 450, in some embodiments, the device detects inputs on a touch-screen display (where the touchsensitive surface and the display are combined), as shown in Figure 4A.

[00147] Figure 5A illustrates user interface 5002-A for a file navigation application displayed on display 450. In some embodiments, user interface 5002-A is used to manage, view, access and/or organize files residing on the device (e.g., device 100 or device 300). Figure 5A also illustrates various control objects, such as directory control objects 5006, and file view control objects 5008. In Figure 5A, user interface 5002 includes files displayed under a list view. File view control object 5008-2, which corresponds to a list view option, is displayed in a visually distinguished manner from other file view control objects (e.g., object 5008-1), to indicate to the user of the device that user interface 5002-A includes the list view option, of the file view options, has been selected. User interface 5002-A illustrates that the contents of the “Macintosh HD” directory are being displayed, as indicated by title 5012 and directory control object 5006-1 being displayed in a visually distinct manner from other directory control objects, such as object 5006-2.

[00148] User interface 5002 also shows several icons representing files and folders. These file and folder icons are exemplary draggable objects 5004. In some embodiments, draggable objects 5004 can be moved from one location in a user interface, such as user interface 5002-A, to another location. In some embodiments, draggable objects refer to user interface objects that are configured to be moved independently (e.g., draggable objects 5004 can be moved without moving user interface 5002-A, although draggable objects 5004 may also be moved by moving user interface 5002-A). In some embodiments, control objects such as directory control objects 5006 or file view control objects 5008 cannot be moved independently (e.g., certain control objects 5006 cannot be around within user interface 5002A). In some embodiments, draggable objects refer to user interface objects that are configured to be moved individually (e.g., a draggable object 5004 can be moved without moving any other user interface objects, such as another draggable object or a control object). In some embodiments, a control object is configured to initiate, when selected or activated, a predefined operation (e.g., changing a view of a user interface) other than displaying content of a draggable object (e.g., a file or a photo) or launching an application that corresponds to the draggable object. Figure 5A illustrates the state of display 450 and touch-sensitive surface 451 before an input is detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates the absence of any contact intensity detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. [00149] Figure 5B illustrates a focus selector 5013 (e.g., a cursor), displayed in user interface 5002-A, over draggable object 5004-2. In Figure 5B, the location of exemplary input that includes contact 5016 on touch-sensitive surface 451 corresponds to the location of the focus selector 5013 in user interface 5002-A. In some embodiments, focus selector was displayed over a different area in user interface 5002-A at a location that corresponds to the location of contact 5014 on touch-sensitive surface 451, before the focus selector 5013 is moved in response to the movement of a contact from the location 5014 to the location 5016. [00150] Contact 5016 is shown to exhibit “minimal” contact with touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity between thresholds ITo and ITl, corresponding to the minimal contact detected, of contact 5016. In some embodiments, a minimal contact with touch-sensitive surface 451 is characterized as any contact detected to have an intensity between thresholds ΓΓο and ITl. In some embodiments, contact 5014 also exhibited minimal contact with touch-sensitive surface 451. In some embodiments, contact 5014 and contact 5016 are part of one continuously detected user interaction (e.g., dragging or tracing gesture) with touch-sensitive surface 451. As used herein, “minimal contact” refers to a contact having intensity within a certain intensity range, and does not necessarily indicate that intensity of a minimal contact is at a minimum. For example, a contact with touch-sensitive surface 451 may have an intensity below the intensity range for a minimal contact (e.g., intensity below ITo).

[00151] Figure 5C illustrates an increase in intensity detected at contact 5016. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates an increase in detected intensity from an intensity below ITl to an intensity above ITl. In some embodiments, the detected increase in intensity at the location of contact 5016 is considered to be a distinct input from the minimal contact detected at contact

5016 in Figure 5B. For example, Figure 5B showed a minimal contact input, while Figure 5C illustrates a “hght press” user input at contact 5016.

[00152] In some embodiments, detecting a contact intensity above intensity threshold ITl while focus selector 5013 is displayed over draggable object 504-2 results in the satisfaction of one or more object selection criteria. For example, if a hght press input is detected on touch-sensitive surface 451 while a cursor is over a file folder, the file folder is selected. In some embodiments, the detected contact intensity must be between ITl and ITd, in order to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria. In some embodiments, detected contact intensity above ITl is sufficient to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria without regard to whether or not the detected contact intensity is above or below ITd.

[00153] Figure 5D illustrates a detected movement 5020 of a user interaction with touch-sensitive surface 451 from contact 5016 to contact 5018. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows the detected intensity of the user interaction at contact 5016 before movement 5020 was initiated. Intensity diagram 5010-B shows the detected intensity of the user interaction at contact 5018 after movement 5020 has concluded. Both contacts have a detected intensity above intensity threshold ITl, and below intensity threshold ITd. In some embodiments, the detected contact intensity must be between ITl and ITd, in order to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria. In some embodiments, detected contact intensity above ITl is sufficient to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria without regard to whether or not the detected contact intensity is above or below ITd.

[00154] Figure 5D also illustrates that in some embodiments, the detected intensity level can fluctuate across a single user interaction, or from contact to contact (e.g., during the movement of a user input from 5016 to 5018). In some embodiments, if the fluctuation in detected intensity causes the detected intensity to exceed ITd or fall below ITl, the one or more object selection criteria wih not be satisfied. In some embodiments, if the fluctuation in detected intensity causes the detected intensity to fall below ITl, the one or more object selection criteria wih not be satisfied. Figure 5D shows focus selector 5013 in a new position within user interface 5002-A, corresponding to the location of contact 5018 and/or movement 5020 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451.

[00155] In some embodiments, user interface 5002-A is said to have one or more regions, where a respective region is associated with one or more operations or display operations. For example, user interface 5002-A shows at least region 5024 and region 5022.

In this example, region 5024 contains one or more draggable objects 5004, and region 5022 contains one or more control objects 5008. In some embodiments, a region contains one or more regions (e.g., sub-regions). For example, each draggable object 5004 within region 5024 is considered to be a respective region or sub-region. In some embodiments, a region is characterized by the display operations which the region is configured to initiate (e.g., changing a file view, changing a calendar view, showing a menu, and changing color or opacity of an object). In some embodiments, a region is characterized by the contents of the region (e.g., containing one or more draggable objects, or containing one or more control objects).

[00156] Figure 5D illustrates draggable object 5004-2 in a visually distinct manner from other draggable objects 5004 (e.g., draggable object 5004-1), to indicate that draggable object 5004-2 is selected. In some embodiments, focus selector 5013 is displayed in conjunction with a representation of the selected object (e.g., a representation of object 50042), when an object is selected. Focus selector 5013 is being displayed over file view control object 5008-1.

[00157] Figure 5D also illustrates that file view control object 5008-1 is visually distinguished in response to focus selector 5013 being displayed over file view control object 5008-1 (and prior to detecting that intensity of the contact satisfies intensity threshold ITd). This visual distinction indicates that file view control object 5008-1 is configured to perform a predefined display operation (e.g., displaying contents of the directory in an icon view). [00158] Figure 5E illustrates detection of an increase in intensity at contact 5018. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows a detected intensity level exceeding intensity threshold ITd. In some embodiments, the detected increase in intensity at the location of contact 5018 is considered to be a distinct input from the contact detected at contact 5018 in Figure 5D. For example, Figure 5D showed a “light press” input, while Figure 5E illustrates a “deep press” user input at contact 5018.

[00159] In response to detecting the increase (or a change) in intensity at contact 5018, file view control object 5008-1 is activated, and in some embodiments, as shown in Figure 5E, it is displayed in a visually distinct manner to indicate that file view control object 5008-1 is activated. In this example, file view control object 5008-1 is an icon-view control object, and a display operation is performed to switch the display of the contents of region 5024 from being shown in a list view to being shown in this icon view. In some embodiments, draggable object 5004-2 is still shown in a visually distinct manner from the other displayed draggable objects, to indicate that draggable object 5004-2 is selected. In some embodiments, detecting that contact 5018 continues to maintain intensity above threshold ITd does not cause any further display operation to be performed. In some embodiments, detecting a reduction in intensity to a level below threshold ITobut above Ilj.at contact 5018, maintains selection of draggable object 5004-2 but does not cause any further display operation to be performed. [00160] Figure 5F illustrates movement of focus selector 5013 (and optionally a representation of selected object 5004-2), in user interface 5002-A from the location corresponding to file view control object 5008-1 to directory control object 5006-2 (e.g., Desktop). Figure 5F shows that a movement 5026 of a user interaction on touch-sensitive surface 451 is detected from contact 5018 to contact 5028. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows the detected intensity of the user interaction at contact 5018 before movement 5026 was initiated. Intensity diagram 5010-B shows the detected intensity of the user interaction at contact 5028 after movement 5026 has concluded. Both contacts have a detected intensity above intensity threshold FTl, and below ITd. In some embodiments, the detected contact intensity must be between ITl and ITd, in order to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria. In some embodiments, detected contact intensity above ITl is sufficient to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria without regard to whether or not the detected contact intensity is above or below ITd.

[00161] Figure 5G illustrates detection of an increase in intensity at contact 5018. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows a detected intensity level exceeding intensity threshold ITd. In some embodiments, the detected increase in intensity at the location of contact 5028 is considered to be a distinct input from the contact detected at contact 5028 in Figure 5F. For example, Figure 5F showed a “light press” input, while Figure 5G illustrates a “deep press” user input at contact 5028.

[00162] In response to detecting the increase (or a change) in intensity at contact 5028, directory control object 5006-2 is activated, and in some embodiments, as shown in Figure 5G, it is displayed in a visually distinct manner to indicate that it is activated. In this example, directory control object 5006-2 corresponds to a file directory called “Desktop”, and a display operation is performed to switch the display of the contents of region 5024 from showing the contents of the “Macintosh HD” directory, to the contents of the “Desktop” directory. In some embodiments, draggable object 5004-2 is still selected, but is not shown in user interface 5002-A because it is still located in a directory that is not being displayed in region 5024 anymore (e.g., in Macintosh HD directory). In some embodiments, detecting that contact 5028 continues to maintain intensity above threshold ITd at does not cause any further display operation to be performed. In some embodiments, detecting a reduction in intensity to a level below threshold ITobut above ITl at contact 5028, maintains selection of draggable object 5004-2 but does not cause any further display operation to be performed.

[00163] Figure 5H illustrates movement of focus selector 5013 (and optionally a representation of selected object 5004-2), in user interface 5002-A from the location corresponding to directory control object 5006-2 to region 5024. Figure 5H shows that a movement 5030 of a user interaction on touch-sensitive surface 451 is detected from contact 5028 to contact 5032. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows the detected intensity of the user interaction at contact 5028 before movement 5030 was initiated. Intensity diagram 5010-B shows the detected intensity of the user interaction at contact 5032 after movement 5030 has concluded. Both contacts have a detected intensity above intensity threshold ITl, and below ITd. As described above, in some embodiments, the detected contact intensity must be between ITl and ITd, in order to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria. In some embodiments, detected contact intensity above ITl is sufficient to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria without regard to whether or not the detected contact intensity is above or below ITd.

[00164] Figure 5H also shows that in some embodiments, displaying the movement of focus selector 5013 from the region corresponding to directory control object 5006-2 to region 5024, while object 5004-2 is selected, includes displaying a representation of selected draggable object 5004-2. In some embodiments, selected draggable object 5004-2 is displayed in a visually distinct manner from other draggable objects in user interface 5002-A as long as draggable object 5004-2 is still selected.

[00165] Figure 51 illustrates no contact being detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A indicates the absence of any intensity as well. In response to detecting a decrease in intensity below threshold ITl (or, optionally failing to meet object selection criteria for one or more other reasons), user interface 5002-A shows de-selection of draggable object 5004-2, and re-location of draggable object 5004-2 to the Desktop directory. In some embodiments, draggable object 5004-2 is no longer displayed in a visually distinct manner from other draggable objects in user interface 5002-A, when it is de-selected.

[00166] Figure 5J illustrates a user interaction detected on touch-sensitive surface 451, at contact 5034. For example, the user interaction is a minimal contact, as described above. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows a detected intensity level below threshold ITl. In response to detecting the minimal contact at contact 5034, focus selector 5013 is shown over draggable object 5004-3.

[00167] Figure 5K illustrates movement of focus selector 5013, in response to detecting movement 5036 on touch-sensitive surface 451, from contact 5034 to 5038. In this example, intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates that the detected intensity of contact 5034 is below threshold ITl and intensity diagram 5010-B illustrates that the detected intensity of contact 5038 is also below threshold ITl. In response to detecting that the intensity level of contact 5034 is below threshold ITl, when focus selector 5013 moves from being displayed over draggable object 5004-3 in Figure 5J, to being displayed over directory control object

5006-3, draggable object 5004-3 is not selected.

[00168] Figure 5L illustrates detection of an increase in intensity at contact 5038. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows a detected intensity level exceeding intensity threshold ITl. In some embodiments, the detected increase in intensity at the location of contact 5038 is considered to be a distinct input from the contact detected at contact 5038 in Figure 5K. For example, Figure 5K showed a “minimal contact” input, while Figure 5L illustrates a “light press” user input at contact 5038.

[00169] Figure 5L also shows focus selector 5013 displayed over directory control object 506-3. In response to detecting the increase in intensity at contact 5038, directory control object 506-3 is activated, and in some embodiments, as shown in Figure 5L, it is displayed in a visually distinct manner to indicate that it is activated. In this example, directory control object 5006-3 corresponds to a file directory called “Backup Directory”, and a display operation is performed to switch the display of the contents of region 5024 from showing the contents of the “Desktop” directory, to the contents of the “Backup Directory” directory. In some embodiments, detecting maintained intensity above threshold ITl at contact 5038 does not cause any further display operation to be performed. In some embodiments, directory control object 506-3 is configured to perform a display operation in user interface 5002-A in response to detecting a change in detected intensity at contact 5038 (e.g., a response to a deep press input).

[00170] Figure 5M illustrates detection of a user interaction with touch-sensitive surface 451 including contact 5040. In this example, intensity diagram 5010-A shows a detected intensity level exceeding intensity threshold ITl. Focus selector 5013 is displayed over draggable object 5004-4 while the intensity level of contact 5040 is detected to exceed intensity threshold ITl. In this example, one or more object selection criteria are satisfied while focus selector 5013 is displayed over draggable object 5004-4, and object 5004-4 is selected.

[00171] Figure 5N illustrates movement of focus selector 5013 (and optionally a representation of selected object 5004-4), in user interface 5002-A from the location corresponding to draggable object 5004-4 to control object 5008-3 (e.g., a search field).

Figure 5N shows that a movement 5042 of a user interaction on touch-sensitive surface 451 is detected from contact 5040 to contact 5044. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows the detected intensity of the user interaction at contact 5040 before movement 5042 was initiated.

Intensity diagram 5010-B shows the detected intensity of the user interaction at contact 5044 after movement 5042 has concluded. Both contacts have a detected intensity above intensity threshold ITl, and below ITd. As described above, in some embodiments, the detected contact intensity must be between ITl and ITd, in order to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria. In some embodiments, detected contact intensity above ITl is sufficient to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria without regard to whether or not the detected contact intensity is above or below ITd.

[00172] Figure 50 illustrates detection of an increase in intensity at contact 5044. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows a detected intensity level exceeding intensity threshold ITd. In some embodiments, the detected increase in intensity at the location of contact 5044 is considered to be a distinct input from the contact detected at contact 5044 in Figure 5N. For example, Figure 5N showed a “light press” input, while Figure 50 illustrates a “deep press” user input at contact 5044. In this example, the device (or user interface 5002-A) is not configured to perform a display operation in response to detection of the “deep press” input while focus selector 5013 is displayed over control object 5008-3.

[00173] Figure 5P illustrates no contact being detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A indicates the absence of any intensity as well. In response to detecting a decrease in intensity below threshold ITl (or, optionally failing to meet object selection criteria for one or more other reasons) regardless of whether or not a contact is detected on touch-sensitive surface 451, user interface 5002-A shows de-selection of draggable object 5004-4, and continued display of object 5004-4 in the “Backup Directory” directory. In some embodiments, draggable object 5004-4 is no longer displayed in a visually distinct manner from other draggable objects in user interface 5002-A, when it is de-selected. In this example, control object 5008-3 is not configured to perform an operation involving placement of a draggable object 5004 over it. For example, dragging a folder from a directory to a search field and releasing it does not result in performance of any operations associated with the search field.

[00174] Figure 5Q illustrates user interfaces of two applications or two instances of applications displayed on display 450. User interface 5002-A corresponds to an instance of a file management program (e.g., Finder from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, California), and user interface 5002-B corresponds to another instance of the same file management program.

While Figure 5Q illustrates user interfaces corresponding to two instances of one application, it will be understood that in some embodiments user interface 5002-A corresponds to a first software application and user interface 5002-B corresponds to a second software application, distinct from the first software application (e.g., user interface 5002-A corresponds to an image management application and user interface 5002-B corresponds to a word processing application).

[00175] Figure 5R illustrates detection of a user interaction (e.g., a light press input) on touch-sensitive surface 451, including contact 5046. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows a detected intensity level above threshold ITl. In response to detecting the user interaction at contact 5046, focus selector 5013 is shown over draggable object 5004-5. In this example, one or more object selection criteria are satisfied while focus selector 5013 is displayed over draggable object 5004-5, and object 5004-5 is selected.

[00176] Figure 5S illustrates movement of focus selector 5013 (and optionally a representation of selected object 5004-5), in user interface 5002-A from the location corresponding to draggable object 5004-5 to a visible portion of user interface 5002-B. Figure 5S shows that a movement 5048 of a user interaction on touch-sensitive surface 451 is detected from contact 5046 to contact 5050. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows the detected intensity of the user interaction at contact 5046 before movement 5048 was initiated.

Intensity diagram 5010-B shows the detected intensity of the user interaction at contact 5050 after movement 5048 has concluded. Both contacts have a detected intensity above intensity threshold ITl, and below ITd. As described above, in some embodiments, the detected contact intensity must be between ITl and ITd, in order to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria. In some embodiments, detected contact intensity above ITl is sufficient to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria without regard to whether or not the detected contact intensity is above or below ITd.

[00177] Figure 5T illustrates detection of an increase in intensity at contact 5050 in accordance with some embodiments. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows a detected intensity level exceeding intensity threshold ITd. In some embodiments, the detected increase in intensity at the location of contact 5050 is considered to be a distinct input from the contact detected at contact 5050 in Figure 5S. In this example, the focus selector 5013 is displayed over at least a portion of user interface 5002-B when the increase in intensity is detected. In some embodiments, user interface 5002-B is displayed in a visually distinct way from other displayed user interfaces in display 450 (e.g., user interface 5002-A), in response to detecting focus selector 5013 over at least a portion of user interface 5002-B, or in response to detecting focus selector 5013 over at least a portion of user interface 5002-B while the intensity of contact 5050 is above threshold ITl, or in response to detecting focus selector 5013 over at least a portion of user interface 5002-B while the intensity of contact 5050 is above threshold ITd. For example, user interface 5002-B is displayed with a glowing border to indicate that the focus selector was successfully moved over to at least a portion of user interface 5002-B. In some embodiments, user interface 5002-B is displayed in a visually distinct manner to indicate the ability to perform an operation in response to detecting an intensity of contact 5050 above threshold ITd.

[00178] Figure 5U illustrates some embodiments, where contact 5050 is detected to have an intensity level maintained at a particular level or range (e.g., between threshold ITl, and threshold ITd) for at least a predetermined amount of time, while the focus selector 5013 is displayed over at least a portion of user interface 5002-B. For example, a predetermined time duration threshold of 2 seconds is met by detecting a “light press” input for a time duration 5052 of 2.5 seconds at a location on touch-sensitive surface 451, corresponding to a visible portion of user interface 5002-B.

[00179] Figure 5V illustrates a display operation performed in response to the activities of either Figure 5T or Figure 5U. In Figure 5V, user interface 5002-B is displayed in front of user interface 5002-A, allowing the user of the device to see the contents of user interface 5002-B. In some embodiments, after the display operation is performed to display user interface 5002-B over user interface 5002-A, the intensity level of contact 5050 is detected to have decreased from being above threshold ITd to being between threshold ITl, and threshold ITd. In some embodiments, the detected contact intensity of contact 5050 is maintained at a level between ITl and ITd, in order to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria.

[00180] In some embodiments, draggable object 5004-5 is still selected, but is not shown in user interface 5002-B because object 5004-5 is still located in a directory that is being displayed in user interface 5002-A (e.g., Backup Directory), and user interface 5002-B is displaying the contents of a different directory (e.g., Macintosh HD). In some embodiments, detecting maintained intensity above threshold ITd at contact 5050 does not cause any further display operation to be performed. In some embodiments, detecting a reduction in intensity to a level below threshold ITd but above ITl at contact 5050, maintains selection of draggable object 5004-5 but does not cause any further display operation to be performed.

[00181] Figure 5W illustrates movement of focus selector 5013 (and optionally a representation of selected object 5004-5), in user interface 5002-B from region 5052 of the user interface to region 5054. Figure 5W shows that a movement 5056 of a user interaction on touch-sensitive surface 451 is detected from contact 5050 to contact 5058. Intensity diagram 5010-A shows the detected intensity of the user interaction at contact 5050 before movement 5056 was initiated. Intensity diagram 5010-B shows the detected intensity of the user interaction at contact 5058 after movement 5056 has concluded. Both contacts have a detected intensity above intensity threshold ITl, and below ITd. As described above, in some embodiments, the detected contact intensity must be between ITl and ITd, in order to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria. In some embodiments, detected contact intensity above ITl is sufficient to satisfy the one or more object selection criteria without regard to whether or not the detected contact intensity is above or below ITd.

[00182] Figure 5X illustrates no contact being detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A indicates the absence of any intensity as well. In response to detecting a decrease in intensity below threshold ITl (or, optionally failing to meet object selection criteria for one or more other reasons) regardless of whether or not a contact remains on touch-sensitive surface 451, user interface 5002-B shows de-selection of draggable object 5004-5, and re-location of draggable object 5004-5 to the “Macintosh HD” directory displayed in user interface 5002-B. In some embodiments, draggable object 5004-5 is no longer displayed in a visually distinct manner from other draggable objects in user interface 5002-B, when it is de-selected.

[00183] Figure 5Y illustrates tactile output setting chart 5060, used to indicate activation of one or more tactile output settings associated with one or more tactile output generators of the device. In some embodiments, one or more tactile output generators are embedded in or are otherwise coupled to touch-sensitive surface 451. Examples of tactile outputs will be discussed with respect to touch-sensitive surface 451, but it will be understood that other physical implementations for providing tactile output are possible and intended to be included herein.

[00184] Figure 5 Y illustrates a first tactile output setting being active, and a user interaction including contact 5062 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. In some embodiments, the first tactile output setting corresponds to a “silent trackpad mode,” or a mode involving little to no tactile output generation and/or little to no sound generation in conjunction with the performance of display operations. In some embodiments, the silent trackpad mode is a mode of touch-sensitive surface operation in which the features of a normal mode of touch-sensitive surface operation are available at lower intensity thresholds (e.g., instead of pressing to ITl and then releasing, the user can tap on the touch-sensitive surface and then release to perform a primary operation, and instead of pressing to ITd and then releasing, the user press to ITl and then release to perform an alternate operation). This enables users to access all of the functionality of the normal mode of touch-sensitive surface operation without applying as much force. Additionally, in the “silent trackpad” mode of operation, some audible or tactile outputs associated with reaching different intensity levels can be reduced so as to reduce the noise caused by using the device in quiet environments (e.g., environments with low ambient noise, such as libraries, business meetings, classrooms, etc.).

[00185] Contact 5062 is shown to exhibit minimal contact with touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity between thresholds ITo and ITl, corresponding to the minimal contact detected, of contact 5062. For example, the user interaction including contact 5062 is a light tap on touch-sensitive surface 451, or a very light, continuously maintained contact.

[00186] Focus selector 5013 is shown to be displayed over draggable object 5004-6, of user interface 5002-B. As described above, in some embodiments, respective objects of a user interface displayed on display 450, are defined to have respective regions. Accordingly, in response to detecting a contact with intensity between thresholds ITo and ITl while the first tactile output setting is active (e.g., silent trackpad mode) and focus selector 5013 is displayed over the region corresponding to draggable object 5004-6, a first display operation is performed. In this example, a folder in the Macintosh HD directory is selected and a display operation is performed to visually distinguish the folder from other un-selected folders in the same directory (e.g., so as to indicate that further user inputs on touch-sensitive surface 451 will affect the selected object, for example a lateral movement of the contact on touch-sensitive surface 451 will cause user interface object 5004-6 to be moved on the display, while pressing harder on touch-sensitive surface 451 will cause a contextual menu to be displayed). In this example there is no tactile output generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments a tactile output is generated. In this example there is no sound generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments a sound is generated. In some embodiments, a quick tap on touch sensitive surface 451 (between thresholds ITo and ITl that ends within a predetermined time period) causes a primary activation operation to be performed, such as opening the “users” folder represented by icon 5004-6, while a maintained contact on touch sensitive surface 451 (between thresholds ITo and ITl that does not end within a predetermined time period) enables other operations to be performed (e.g., moving user interface object 5004-6).

[00187] Figure 5Z illustrates the first tactile output setting being active (e.g., silent trackpad mode), and a user interaction including contact 5062 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd, corresponding to contact 5062. For example, the user interaction including contact 5062 is a medium-intensity, continuously maintained contact (e.g., a contact with intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd).

[00188] Focus selector 5013 is shown to be displayed over draggable object 5004-6, of user interface 5002-B. In response to detecting focus selector 5013 over the region corresponding to draggable object 5004-6 while the first tactile output setting is active and a contact intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd is detected, a second display operation is performed. In this example, it is desired to view options relating to a particular folder in the Macintosh HD directory, and a display operation is performed to display a menu 5064 of options relating to the folder. In this example there is no tactile output generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments a tactile output is generated. In this example there is no sound generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments a sound is generated.

[00189] In some embodiments, the second display operation is performed in response to detecting a contact intensity above intensity threshold ITl while focus selector 5013 is displayed over the region corresponding to draggable object 5004-6 and the first tactile output setting is active (e.g., silent trackpad mode) regardless of whether or not the contact intensity is above intensity threshold ITd.

[00190] In some embodiments, the second display operation is performed in response to detecting a contact intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd while focus selector 5013 is displayed over the region corresponding to draggable object 5004-6 and the first tactile output setting is active, and no further display operation is performed in response to detecting a contact intensity above intensity threshold ITd while focus selector 5013 is displayed over the region corresponding to draggable object 5004-6 and the first tactile output setting is active. For example, the menu 5064 remains on display even when the contact intensity is above threshold ITd.

[00191] Figure 5AA illustrates alternate embodiments, where the first tactile output setting is active (e.g., silent trackpad mode), and a user interaction includes contact 5062 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity above threshold ITd, corresponding to contact 5062. For example, the user interaction including contact 5062 is a high-intensity, short-duration contact (e.g., a contact with intensity above threshold ITd).

[00192] Focus selector 5013 is shown to be displayed over draggable object 5004-6, of user interface 5002-B. In response to detecting focus selector 5013 over the region corresponding to draggable object 5004-6 while the first tactile output setting is active and a contact intensity above threshold ITd is detected, no display operation is performed. In this example, while the first tactile output setting is active, there is no display operation associated with the detected intensity level. In this example there is no tactile output generated in response to detecting the contact, but in some embodiments a tactile output is generated. In this example there is no sound generated in response to detecting the contact, but in some embodiments a sound is generated.

[00193] Figure 5BB illustrates a second tactile output setting being active, and a user interaction including contact 5062 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity between thresholds ITo and ITl, corresponding to the minimal contact detected, of contact 5062. For example, the user interaction including contact 5062 is a light tap on touch-sensitive surface 451, or a very light, continuously maintained contact.

[00194] Focus selector 5013 is shown to be displayed over draggable object 5004-6, of user interface 5002-B. In response to detecting focus selector 5013 over the region corresponding to draggable object 5004-6 while the second tactile output setting is active and a contact intensity between thresholds ITo and ITl is detected, no display operation is performed. In this example, while the second tactile output setting is active, there is no display operation associated with the detected intensity level. In this example there is no tactile output generated in response to detecting the contact, but in some embodiments a tactile output is generated. In this example there is no sound generated in response to detecting the contact, but in some embodiments a sound is generated.

[00195] Figure 5CC illustrates a second tactile output setting being active, and a user interaction including contact 5062 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd, corresponding to contact 5062. For example, the user interaction including contact 5062 is a medium-intensity, continuously maintained contact (e.g., a contact with intensity between thresholds ITl and IT<sub>D</sub>).

[00196] Focus selector 5013 is shown to be displayed over draggable object 5004-6, of user interface 5002-B. In response to detecting focus selector 5013 over the region corresponding to draggable object 5004-6 while the second tactile output setting is active and a contact intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd is detected, a first display operation is performed. In some embodiments a different display operation is performed. In this example, a folder in the Macintosh HD directory is selected and a display operation is performed to visually distinguish the folder from other un-selected folders in the same directory (e.g., so as to indicate that further user inputs on touch-sensitive surface 451 will affect the selected object, for example a lateral movement of the contact on touch-sensitive surface 451 will cause user interface object 5004-6 to be moved on the display, while pressing harder on touch-sensitive surface 451 will cause a contextual menu to be displayed). In this example there is a first tactile output 5066 generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments no tactile output is generated, or a different tactile output is generated. In this example there is no sound generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments a sound is generated. In some embodiments a particular sound is generated in conjunction with tactile output 5066 (e.g., the first tactile output). In some embodiments, a quick tap on touch sensitive surface 451 (between thresholds ITl and ITd that ends within a predetermined time period) causes a primary activation operation to be performed, such as opening the “users” folder represented by icon 5004-6, while a maintained contact on touch sensitive surface 451 (between thresholds ITl and ITd that does not end within a predetermined time period) enables other operations to be performed (e.g., moving user interface object 5004-6).

[00197] Figure 5DD illustrates a second tactile output setting being active, and a user interaction including contact 5062 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity above threshold ITd, corresponding to contact 5062. For example, the user interaction including contact 5062 is a high-intensity, short-duration contact (e.g., a contact with intensity above threshold ITd).

[00198] Focus selector 5013 is shown to be displayed over draggable object 5004-6, of user interface 5002-B. In response to detecting focus selector 5013 over the region corresponding to draggable object 5004-6 while the second tactile output setting is active and a contact intensity above threshold ITd is detected, a second display operation is performed.

In some embodiments a different display operation is performed. In this example, it is desired to view options relating to a particular folder in the Macintosh HD directory, and a display operation is performed to display a menu 5064 of options relating to the folder. In this example there is a second tactile output 5068 generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments no tactile output is generated, or a different tactile output is generated. In this example there is no sound generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments a sound is generated. In some embodiments a particular sound is generated in conjunction with tactile output 5068 (e.g., the second tactile output), and in some embodiments, the particular sound associated with tactile output 5068 is distinct from a sound associated with another other type of tactile output (e.g., tactile output 5066).

[00199] Figure 5EE illustrates region chart 5070 that indicates a type of region in user interface 5002-A that focus selector 5013 is displayed over. A first region is configured to perform particular display operations in response to the detection of particular types of inputs on touch-sensitive surface 451, and a second region is configured to perform at least one different display operation in response to the detection of particular types of inputs on touchsensitive surface 451. For example, the first region performs a first display operation in response to detecting a “light press” on touch-sensitive surface 451, and performs a second display operation in response to detecting a “deep press” on surface 451, while the second region performs a third display operation in response to detecting a “light press” on touchsensitive surface 451, and does not perform any display operation in response to detecting a “deep press” on surface 451. In some embodiments, regions are further characterized by one or more tactile output operations performed in conjunction with display operations.

[00200] Figure 5EE illustrates focus selector 5013 displayed over a first region, and a user interaction including contact 5062 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd, corresponding to contact 5062. For example, the user interaction including contact 5062 is a medium-intensity, continuously maintained contact (e.g., a contact with intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd).

[00201] Focus selector 5013 is shown to be displayed over draggable object 5004-6, of user interface 5002-B. In response to detecting focus selector 5013 over the region corresponding to draggable object 5004-6 (defined as being of the first region type), and a contact intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd, a first display operation is performed. In some embodiments a different display operation is performed. In this example, a folder in the Macintosh HD directory is selected and a display operation is performed to visually distinguish the folder from other un-selected folders in the same directory. In this example there is a third tactile output 5072 generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments no tactile output is generated, or a different tactile output is generated. In this example there is no sound generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments a sound is generated. In some embodiments a particular sound is generated in conjunction with tactile output 5072 (e.g., the third tactile output).

[00202] Figure 5FF illustrates focus selector 5013 displayed over a first region, and a user interaction including contact 5062 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity above threshold ITd, corresponding to contact 5062. For example, the user interaction including contact 5062 is a high-intensity, shortduration contact (e.g., a contact with intensity above threshold ITd).

[00203] Focus selector 5013 is shown to be displayed over draggable object 5004-6, of user interface 5002-B. In response to detecting focus selector 5013 over the region corresponding to draggable object 5004-6 (defined as being of the first region type), and a contact intensity above threshold ITd, a second display operation is performed. In this example, it is desired to view options relating to a particular folder in the Macintosh HD directory, and a display operation is performed to display a menu 5064 of options relating to the folder. In this example there is a first tactile output 5066 generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments no tactile output is generated or a different tactile output is generated. In this example there is no sound generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments a sound is generated in conjunction with tactile output 5066 (e.g., the first tactile output).

[00204] Figure 5GG illustrates focus selector 5013 is displayed over a second region (as noted in region chart 5070), and a user interaction that includes contact 5074 is detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd, corresponding to contact 5074. For example, the user interaction including contact 5074 is a medium-intensity, continuously maintained contact (e.g., a contact with intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd).

[00205] Figure 5HH also illustrates that focus selector 5013 is shown to be displayed over file view control object 5008-1, of user interface 5002-B. In response to detecting focus selector 5013 over the region corresponding to file view control object 5008-1 (defined as being of the second region type), and a contact intensity above threshold ITl and below threshold ITd, a third display operation is performed. In this example, file view control object 5008-1 is activated and the third display operation changes the view of the contents of the “Macintosh HD” directory from being shown in list view (e.g., in Figure 5GG), to being shown in icon view. In this example there is a (fourth) tactile output 5076 generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments no tactile output is generated or a different tactile output is generated (e.g., a third tactile output). In this example there is no sound generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments a sound is generated in conjunction with tactile output 5076 (e.g., the fourth tactile output).

[00206] Figure 511 illustrates focus selector 5013 displayed over file view control object 5008-1 of the second region type, and a user interaction including contact 5074 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity above threshold ITd, corresponding to contact 5062. For example, the user interaction including contact 5062 is a high-intensity, short-duration contact (e.g., a contact with intensity above threshold ITd). In this example, while the focus selector 5013 is detected over an object of the second region type, there is no display operation associated with the detected intensity level. In this example there is a second tactile output 5068 generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments no tactile output is generated, or a different tactile output is generated. In this example there is no sound generated in conjunction with performing the display operation, but in some embodiments a sound is generated. In some embodiments a particular sound is generated in conjunction with tactile output 5068 (e.g., the second tactile output), and in some embodiments, the particular sound associated with tactile output 5068 is distinct from a sound associated with another other type of tactile output (e.g., tactile output 5066).

[00207] Figure 5JJ illustrates that focus selector 5013 is displayed over a control object 5008-4 of a third region type (as noted in region chart 5070), and a user interaction that includes contact 5078 is detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd, corresponding to contact 5078. For example, the user interaction including contact 5074 is a medium-intensity, continuously maintained contact (e.g., a contact with an intensity between thresholds ITl and ITd). In response to detecting the intensity level, no display operation is performed. In this example there is a third tactile output 5072 generated in response to detecting the intensity level of contact 5078, but in some embodiments no tactile output is generated, or a different tactile output is generated. In some embodiments a particular sound is generated in conjunction with tactile output 5072 (e.g., the third tactile output), and in some embodiments, a particular sound associated with tactile output 5072 is distinct from a sound associated with another other type of tactile output (e.g., a tactile output that indicates that.

[00208] Figure 5KK illustrates an increase in intensity detected at contact 5078. Intensity diagram 5010-A illustrates a detected intensity above threshold ITd, corresponding to contact 5078. For example, the user interaction including contact 5062 is a high-intensity, short-duration contact (e.g., a contact with intensity above threshold ITd ). In this example, in response to detecting the intensity level, no display operation is performed. In this example there is a second tactile output 5068 generated in response to detecting the intensity level of contact 5078, but in some embodiments no tactile output is generated, or a different tactile output is generated. In some embodiments a particular sound is generated in conjunction with tactile output 5068 (e.g., the second tactile output), and in some embodiments, a particular sound associated with tactile output 5068 is distinct from a sound associated with another other type of tactile output.

[00209] Figure 5FF illustrates an exemplary settings user interface or control panel 5080 for changing one or more tactile outputs and/or one or more activation criteria in accordance with some embodiments. For example, control panel 5080 has one or more control objects 5082 for adjusting the magnitude of a first tactile output 5084. In this example, the magnitude control objects 5082 are discrete control objects that each correspond to a particular setting, but in some embodiments, the magnitude of first tactile output 5084 can be adjusted using a continuous control object such as control object 5086. Control object 5086 allows for an adjustment of the duration of first tactile output 5084. In some embodiments the duration of the first tactile output can be adjusted using discrete control objects such as control objects 5082.

[00210] Figure 5FF also illustrates control objects corresponding to adjustment of first activation criteria 5090. In some embodiments, activation criteria such as first activation criteria 5090 include intensity threshold control objects 5092. In some embodiments, intensity threshold control objects 5092 are tied to control objects 5082 for adjusting the magnitude of a tactile output. In some embodiments, the magnitude of first tactile output 5084 and the intensity threshold of first activation criteria 5090 are both adjusted using one or more continuous control objects (e.g., a slider bar that adjusts both settings simultaneously). While the above description pertains to a first tactile output 5084 and first activation criteria 5090, in some embodiments the same principles apply to one or more other tactile outputs and activation criteria. In some embodiments, a respective tactile output setting has a corresponding activation criteria setting. In some embodiments, a change to one setting (or pair of settings), causes a change to another setting (or pair of settings).

[00211] In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 5FF, control panel 5080 has a user interface element 5098 for applying changes to one or more settings in control panel 5080. In some embodiments, control panel 5080 has a user interface element 5094 for saving changes to one or more settings and exiting control panel 5080. In some embodiments, control panel 5080 has a user interface element 5096 for canceling any changes made to one or more settings and ceasing to display control panel 5080 in display 450.

[00212] Figures 5MM-5NN illustrate exemplary settings user interfaces or control panels for changing one or more tactile outputs and/or one or more activation criteria in accordance with some embodiments.

[00213] The settings user interfaces illustrated in Figures 5MM-5NN are used to adjust settings for operations of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a trackpad). In Figures 5MM-5NN, the settings user interfaces include options that are not directly related to intensity based user inputs.

[00214] In Figure 5MM, the intensity threshold control objects 5088 are radio buttons that correspond to low, medium, and high intensity levels. Based on user selection of one of the radio buttons, intensity thresholds (e.g., ITl and ITd) are changed. For example, ITl and ITd are increased in response to selection of the radio button that corresponds to high intensity thresholds (from previous selection of the radio button that corresponds to low or medium intensity thresholds).

[00215] In Figure 5NN, the intensity threshold control object 5089 is a slider that corresponds to a plurality of intensity levels. In Figure 5NN, the intensity threshold control object 5089 provides more than three intensity levels so that a finer adjustment of the intensity levels is allowed.

[00216] In some embodiments, tactile output settings are adjusted based on the user interaction with the intensity threshold control object(s) (e.g., user selection of one of the radio buttons in Figure 5 MM or user adjustment of the slider in Figure 5NN). In some embodiments, delay time between a light press and a deep press is adjusted based on the user interaction with the intensity threshold control object(s).

[00217] The settings user interfaces or control panels illustrated in Figures 5MM-5NN provide simple user interfaces for easy adjustment of the intensity-based operations of the electronic device, thereby reducing the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from the user.

[00218] Figures 5OO-5QQ are exemplary intensity diagrams in accordance with some embodiments.

[00219] Figure 500 illustrates three intensity diagrams (left, center, and right) in accordance with some embodiments. The left intensity diagram in Figure 500 includes multiple intensity thresholds, such as primary activation intensity threshold (e.g., an intensity threshold that an intensity of a contact needs to exceed in order to activate a first operation), primary activation release threshold (e.g., an intensity threshold that an intensity of a contact needs to fall below, after exceeding the primary activation intensity threshold, in order to cease the first operation), deep activation intensity threshold (e.g., an intensity threshold that an intensity of a contact needs to exceed in order to activate a second operation in some embodiments), and deep release intensity threshold (e.g., an intensity threshold that an intensity of a contact needs to fall below, after exceeding the deep activation intensity threshold, in order to cease the second operation).

[00220] The center intensity diagram in Figure 500 illustrates an intensity of a contact that changes over time (e.g., a hght press input). In the center intensity diagram in Figure 500, the intensity of the contact increases over time to exceed the primary activation intensity threshold, thereby activating the first operation. The center intensity diagram in Figure 500 also illustrates that, subsequent to the intensity of the contact exceeds the primary activation intensity threshold, the intensity of the contact decreases and falls below the primary release intensity threshold.

[00221] The right intensity diagram in Figure 500 illustrates an intensity of a contact that changes over time and exceeds the deep activation intensity threshold (e.g., a deep press input). In some embodiments, when the intensity of the contact exceeds the deep activation intensity threshold, the second operation (e.g., a deep press operation) is activated.

[00222] In some cases, users unintentionally press the touch-sensitive surface with high intensity (e.g., a deep press input) without an intention to activate the second operation (e.g., a deep press operation). The unintentional deep press input may be due to variation in perception of intensity from person to person, variation in finger strength from person to person, variation in perception of intensity for an individual over time, and/or variation in intensity for an individual over time (e.g., decreased intensity due to fatigue or increased intensity due to reduced sensitivity of the individual), etc. An unintentional activation of the second operation (e.g., a deep press operation) is inefficient, wastes time, and degrades the user experience. Thus, it is important to reduce “unintentional” activations of the second operation (e.g., a deep press operation).

[00223] The intensity diagrams in Figures 5PP-5QQ illustrate features that reduce unintentional activation of a deep press operation.

[00224] Figure 5PP illustrates three intensity diagrams (left, center, and right). The left intensity diagram in Figure 5PP illustrates a decaying intensity threshold offset for the deep activation intensity threshold that decreases over time. In some embodiments, the decaying intensity threshold offset decreases from the time at which an intensity of a contact satisfies a lower activation intensity threshold (e.g., primary activation intensity threshold in Figure 500). In some embodiments, the decaying intensity threshold offset decreases after a predetermined duration (e.g., 10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms, 70 ms, 80 ms, 90 ms, 100 ms, 110 ms, 120 ms, 130 ms, 140 ms, 150 ms, 160 ms, 170 ms, 180 ms, 190 ms, 200 ms, 300 ms, 400 ms, 500 ms, etc.) after the time at which an intensity of a contact satisfies the lower activation intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the decaying intensity threshold offset decreases in accordance with a predefined time constant (e.g., 0.1 s, 0.2 s, 0.3 s, 0.4 s, 0.5 s, 0.6 s, 0.7 s, 0.8 s, 0.9 s, 1.0 s, 1.1 s, 1.2 s, 1.3 s, 1.4 s, 1.5 s, 1.6 s, 1.7 s, 1.8 s, 1.9 s, 2 s, 3 s, 4 s, 5 s, etc). In some embodiments, the offset starts from a high intensity threshold. When this decaying intensity threshold offset is used, an intensity of a contact needs to exceed the increased initial threshold to activate a deep press operation. Thus, this decaying intensity threshold offset prevents a quick high intensity press input from activating a deep press operation.

[00225] The center intensity diagram in Figure 5PP illustrates an intensity threshold offset for the deep activation intensity threshold that trails an intensity of a contact (e.g., “trailing force” intensity threshold offset in Figure 5PP, which trails the “input force” of a contact in Figure 5PP) in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, the trailing force intensity offset is determined based on an intensity of the contact over time. For example, the trailing force intensity threshold offset in the center intensity diagram in Figure 5PP is determined by processing intensity of the contact with a low pass filter (e.g., with a predefined time constant (e.g., 0.1 s, 0.2 s, 0.3 s, 0.4 s, 0.5 s, 0.6 s, 0.7 s, 0.8 s, 0.9 s, 1.0 s, 1.1 s, 1.2 s, 1.3 s, 1.4 s, 1.5 s, 1.6 s, 1.7 s, 1.8 s, 1.9 s, 2 s, 3 s, 4 s, 5 s, etc). When this trailing force intensity threshold offset is used, the deep activation intensity threshold is increased as an intensity of a contact increases (e.g., when a user applies higher intensity while dragging a contact). Thus, this trailing force intensity threshold offset reduces activation of a deep press operation by a gradual increase in intensity of a contact over time (e.g., during a drag). [00226] The right intensity diagram in Figure 5PP illustrates that a first offset that decreases over time (e.g., the decaying intensity threshold offset described with respect to the left intensity diagram in Figure 5PP), a second offset that changes over time based on an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the trailing force intensity threshold offset described with respect to the center intensity diagram in Figure 5PP), and/or a sum of the first offset and the second offset (e.g., a weighted sum of the first offset and the second offset, with equal or different weights) may be used to reduce unintentional activation of a deep press operation.

[00227] Figure 5QQ illustrates two intensity versus time diagrams (top and bottom). The top intensity versus time diagram in Figure 5QQ illustrates that a dynamic (time varying) intensity threshold 5102 includes a sum of the first offset and the second offset. In the top intensity diagram in Figure 5QQ, an intensity 5202 of a contact does not exceed the intensity threshold 5102, and thus a deep press operation is not activated.

[00228] The bottom intensity diagram in Figure 5QQ illustrates that another dynamic (time varying) intensity threshold 5104. The intensity threshold 5104 is offset from the intensity threshold 5102 by an intensity threshold offset for a user that has been determined based on past inputs from the user. For example, for a user who has a tendency to provide high intensity inputs, the intensity threshold offset is increased (e.g., by the heavy clicker offset in Figure 5QQ) to prevent unintentional activation of a deep press operation. In some embodiments, the intensity offset for a user is a time-independent offset for a particular input (e.g., the intensity offset for a user does not change during the course of the particular input, although other intensity offsets for the deep activation intensity threshold, such as the first offset and the second offset, may change over time during the course of the particular input). [00229] Figures 6A-6E illustrate a flow diagram of a method 600 of enabling interaction with one or more control objects in a user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. The method 600 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touchsensitive surface. Some operations in method 600 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[00230] As described below, the method 600 provides an intuitive way to interact with one or more control objects in a user interface. The method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when interacting with one or more control objects in a user interface, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For batteryoperated electronic devices, enabling a user to interact with one or more control objects in a user interface faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[00231] The device displays (602) on the display, a user interface of a first software application that includes one or more draggable objects (e.g., file icons, folder icons, calendar entries, such as folder icon 5004-2 in Figure 5B) and one or more control objects distinct from the one or more draggable objects (e.g., buttons, toolbars, menus, such as file view control object 5008-1 in Figure 5B). While the device displays the user interface of the first software application, the device performs at least the following operations.

[00232] The device detects (604) a contact (e.g., contact 5016 in Figure 5C) on the touch-sensitive surface at a first location while a focus selector is displayed over a first draggable object of the one or more draggable objects displayed on the display.

[00233] After detecting the contact on the touch-sensitive surface at the first location, the device detects (606) a movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to a second location that corresponds to a first control object of the one or more control objects displayed on the display (e.g., movement 5020 in Figure 5D from location 5016 to location 5018 on touch-sensitive surface 451).

[00234] In some embodiments, in response to detecting movement of the contact from the first location to the second location, and in accordance with a determination that the contact at the first location does not satisfy the object selection criteria, the device moves (608) the focus selector to the first control object in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to the first control object without moving the first draggable object to the first control object (e.g., if the contact at the first location does not satisfy the object selection criteria, the first draggable object is not selected and the focus selector moves without the first draggable object). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the contact at the second location satisfies the second intensity criteria, the device performs (610) the first predetermined operation that corresponds to activation of the first control object without moving the first draggable object to the first control object (e.g., if the focus selector moves over to file view control object 5008-1, icon view control object 5008-1 is activated and contents of the directory is displayed in an icon view). In some embodiments, the method includes, in accordance with a determination that the contact at the second location satisfies the first intensity criteria, performing the first predetermined operation that corresponds to activation of the first control object.

[00235] In response to detecting movement of the contact from the first location to the second location, and in accordance with a determination that the contact at the first location satisfies object selection criteria, the device moves (612) the first draggable object to the first control object in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to the first control object (e.g., Figure 5D).

[00236] In some embodiments, in response to moving the first draggable object to the first control object, and in accordance with a determination that the first software application is configured to perform the first predetermined operation in response to detecting a contact at the second location that satisfies the first intensity criteria, the device visually distinguishes (614) the first control object prior to determining that the contact satisfies the first intensity criteria (e.g., file view control object 5008-1 is visually distinguished in Figure 5D).

[00237] Furthermore, in some embodiments, the device detects (616) a movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to a fourth location that corresponds to a second control object of the one or more control objects (e.g., Figure 5N). In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the first software application is not configured to perform a predetermined operation in response to detecting a contact at the fourth location that satisfies the first intensity criteria, the device foregoes (618) visually distinguishing the second control object (e.g., in Figure 5N, control object 5008-3 is not visually distinguished). [00238] In accordance with a determination that the contact at the second location satisfies first intensity criteria, the device performs (620) a first predetermined operation that corresponds to activation of the first control object (e.g., displaying contents of the directory in an icon view, as shown in Figure 5E).

[00239] In some embodiments, the user interface includes (622) multiple distinct portions, a first portion of the multiple distinct portions (e.g., region 5022) includes the first control object, and performing the first predetermined operation that corresponds to activation of the first control object includes changing a second portion (e.g., region 5024), distinct from the first portion, of the multiple distinct portions. In some embodiments, changing the second portion includes forgoing a change to the first portion. For example, in Figure 5E, performing the first predetermined operation updates region 5024. In some embodiments, changing the second portion includes maintaining the first portion.

[00240] In some embodiments, the first software application is a calendar application (624), the user interface of the first software application includes multiple time-period user interface elements (e.g., control objects) in the first portion, the one or more draggable objects are one or more calendar entry objects (e.g., one or more graphical representations of calendar events), a respective time-period user interface element of the multiple time-period user interface elements corresponds to a predefined unit of time (e.g., day, week, month, and/or year), the second portion of the user interface of the first software application, prior to the determination that the contact at the second location satisfies the first intensity criteria, includes a calendar view that corresponds to a first unit of time (e.g., a day view), and changing the second portion includes replacing the calendar view that corresponds to a first unit of time with a calendar view that corresponds to a second unit of time that is distinct from the first unit of time (e.g., a month view).

[00241] In some embodiments, the first software application is a file system navigation application (626), also called a file manager or a file browser (e.g., Finder, Windows Explorer, and File Explorer) (e.g., the user interface of a file system navigation application in Figure 5B). In some embodiments, the user interface of the first software application includes multiple file view control objects (e.g., an object to show files as icons, and an object to show files in a list) in the first portion, the one or more draggable objects are one or more of file icons and/or folder icons, and a respective file view control object of the multiple file view control objects corresponds to a distinct file view type (e.g., an icon view, a list view, a column view, and/or a cover view). In some embodiments, the second portion of the user interface, prior to the determination that the contact at the second location satisfies the first intensity criteria, includes a file view of a first file view type (e.g., a list view), and changing the second portion includes replacing the file view of the first file view type with a file view of a second file view type that is distinct from the file view of the first file view type (e.g., an icon view).

[00242] In some embodiments, the device, subsequent to moving the first draggable object to the first control object and changing the second portion, detects (628) a movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to a third location that corresponds to the changed second portion on the display. For example, changing the second portion of the display includes replacing the calendar view from a day view to a month view. In another example, changing the second portion of the display includes replacing display of contents in a first directory with display of contents in a second directory (e.g., Figure 5H). Furthermore, in some embodiments, the device moves (630) the first draggable object to a location, in the changed second portion, that corresponds to the third location on the touch-sensitive surface in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to the third location. Furthermore, in some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the contact at the third location does not satisfy the object selection criteria, the device drops (632) the first draggable object at the location, in the changed second portion, that corresponds to the third location on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., Figure 51).

[00243] In some embodiments, the object selection criteria include (634) second intensity criteria. For example, a contact with intensity between ITl and ITd is used to select a draggable object.

[00244] In some embodiments, the device concurrently displays (636) an entirety of the user interface of the first software application with a portion of a user interface of a second software application adjacent to the user interface of the first software application (e.g., user interface 5002-A and user interface 5002-B in Figure 5Q). In some embodiments, the user interface of the first software application is in contact with the portion of the user interface of the second software application. In some embodiments, the user interface of the first software application appears to overlie a portion of the user interface of the second software application.

[00245] Furthermore, in some embodiments, in accordance with the determination that the contact at the first location satisfies the object selection criteria, the device detects (638) a movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to a fifth location that corresponds to the displayed portion of the user interface of the second software application on the display (e.g., Figure 5S). In some embodiments, the device moves (640) the first draggable object to the displayed portion of the user interface of the second software application in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to the fifth location. In some embodiments, the contact continues to satisfy the object selection criteria during the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface to the fifth location.

[00246] In some embodiments, in response to a determination that the contact at the fifth location satisfies the first intensity criteria (e.g., intensity of contact satisfying threshold ITd in Figure 5T), the device replaces (642) a concurrent display of the entirety of the user interface of the first software application and the portion of the user interface of the second software application with a concurrent display of an entirety of the user interface of the second software application and a portion of the user interface of the first software application adjacent to the user interface of the second software application (e.g., user interface 5002-B and user interface 5002-A in Figure 5V). In some embodiments, the user interface of the second software application appears to overlie a portion of the user interface of the first software application.

[00247] In some embodiments, in response to a determination that the contact at the fifth location does not satisfy the first intensity criteria, the device determines (644) a time period during which the contact remains at the fifth location, and in response to a determination that the time period satisfies time-based activation criteria (e.g., focus selector

5013 remains over user interface 5002-B and satisfies the time-based activation criteria, as shown in Figure 5U), the device replaces the concurrent display of the entirety of the user interface of the first software application and the portion of the user interface of the second software application with the concurrent display of an entirety of the user interface of the second software application and the portion of the user interface of the first software application adjacent to the user interface of the second software application (e.g., user interface 5002-B and user interface 5002-A in Figure 5V).

[00248] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 6A-6E have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 700, 800, and 900) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 600 described above with respect to Figures 6A-6E. For example, the contacts, inputs, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and criteria described above with reference to method 600 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, inputs, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and criteria described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 700, 800, and 900). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00249] Figures 7A-7D illustrate a flow diagram of a method 700 of performing operations in conjunction with generating tactile outputs, in accordance with some embodiments. The method 700 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the device includes one or more tactile output generators. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touchsensitive surface. Some operations in method 700 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[00250] As described below, the method 700 provides an intuitive way to perform operations in conjunction with generating tactile outputs. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when performing operations in conjunction with generating tactile outputs, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to perform operations in conjunction with generating tactile outputs faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[00251] The device displays (702), on the display of the electronic device, a user interface of a first software application. While displaying the user interface of the first software application, the device performs at least the following operations.

[00252] The device detects (704) a first input (e.g., a tap gesture) that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the contact included in the first input is associated with a respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with a first operation (e.g., a response to a “light press” or “left click”) and a second operation (e.g., a response to a “deep press,” “right click,” or “option + click”). In some embodiments, the first operation is a first display operation and the second operation is a second display operation.

[00253] In response to detecting the first input (e.g., a tap gesture), and in accordance with a determination that a first tactile output setting is active (e.g., silent trackpad mode) for the first input, the device performs (706) the first operation without generating a tactile output. In some embodiments, the first tactile output setting is active for the first input, based on a location of the contact, a location of the focus selector corresponding to the contact, or a system-wide setting or condition. For example, as illustrated in Figure 5Y, tactile output setting chart 5060 indicates that the first tactile output setting is active. In response to detecting the input associated with contact 5062, having an intensity level below threshold ITl, the “Users” folder (object 5004-6) is highlighted in display 450 (an exemplary first display operation is performed). Figure 5Y also illustrates performance of this operation without generating a tactile output.

[00254] In response to detecting the first input, and in accordance with a determination that a second tactile output setting is active (e.g., non-silent trackpad mode) for the first input, the device forgoes (708) performing the first operation. For example, as illustrated in Figure 5BB, tactile output setting chart 5060 indicates that the second tactile output setting is active. In response to detecting the input associated with contact 5062, having an intensity level below threshold ITl, the “Users” folder (object 5004-6) is not highlighted in display 450 (an exemplary first display operation is not performed). Figure 5BB also illustrates performance of this operation without generating a tactile output.

[00255] The device detects (710) a second input (e.g., a light press) that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the contact included in the second input is associated with the respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with the first operation (e.g., a response to a “light press” or “left click”) and the second operation (e.g., a response to a “deep press,” “right click,” or “option + click”) and the second input is different from the first input.

[00256] In response to detecting the second input, and in accordance with a determination that the second tactile output setting is active (e.g., non-silent trackpad mode) for the second input, the device performs (712) the first operation in conjunction with generating a first tactile output associated with the first operation. For example, as illustrated in Figure 5CC, tactile output setting chart 5060 indicates that the second tactile output setting is active. In response to detecting the input associated with contact 5062, having an intensity level above threshold ITl, and below threshold ITd, the “Users” folder (object 5004-6) is highlighted in display 450 (an exemplary first display operation is performed). Figure 5CC also illustrates performance of this operation in conjunction with generating a first tactile output.

[00257] In some embodiments, the first tactile output (714) lasts for less than a predetermined time. In some embodiments, duration of the first tactile output is independent of duration of the contact remaining on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the second tactile output lasts for less than the predetermined time. In some embodiments, duration of a respective tactile output is less than 0.5 seconds. In some embodiments, the duration of the respective predetermined tactile output is less than 0.4 seconds. In some embodiments, the duration of the respective predetermined tactile output is less than 0.3 seconds. In some embodiments, the duration of the respective predetermined tactile output is less than 0.2 seconds. In some embodiments, the duration of the respective predetermined tactile output is less than 0.1 seconds.

[00258] In response to detecting the second input, and in accordance with a determination that the first tactile output setting is active (e.g., silent trackpad mode) for the second input, the device performs (716) the second operation. In some embodiments, the device performs the second operation instead of the first operation, or without performing the first operation, and/or without generating the first tactile output. For example, as illustrated in Figure 5Z, tactile output setting chart 5060 indicates that the first tactile output setting is active. In response to detecting the input associated with contact 5062, having an intensity level above threshold ITl, and below threshold ITd, a menu associated with the “Users” folder (object 5004-6) is displayed in display 450 (an exemplary second display operation is performed). Figure 5Z also illustrates performance of this operation without generating a first tactile output and without performing the first display operation (e.g., highlighting the “Users” folder).

[00259] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with the determination that the first tactile output setting is active for the second input (e.g., silent trackpad mode), the device performs (718) the second operation without performing the first operation.

[00260] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with the determination that the first tactile output setting is active for the second input (e.g., silent trackpad mode), the device forgoes (720) generation of the first tactile output.

[00261] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with the determination that the first tactile output setting is active for the second input (e.g., silent trackpad mode), the device forgoes (722) generation of a second tactile output associated with the second operation.

[00262] In some embodiments, the device detects (724) a third input (e.g., a deep press) that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the contact included in the third input is associated with the respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with the first operation (e.g., a response to a “light press” or “left click”) and the second operation (e.g., a response to a “deep press,” “right click,” or “option + click”) and the third input is different from the first input and the second input. In some embodiments, the contact in the second input and the contact in the third input are (726) a same contact that is continuously detected on the touch-sensitive surface between the second input and the third input. In some embodiments, the second input satisfies (728) a first intensity threshold and the contact in the third input satisfies a second intensity threshold that is higher than the first intensity threshold.

[00263] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the third input (e.g., a deep press), and in accordance with a determination that the second tactile output setting is active (e.g., non-silent trackpad mode) for the third input, the device performs (730) the second operation in conjunction with generating a second tactile output associated with the second operation. For example, as illustrated in Figure 5DD, tactile output setting chart 5060 indicates that the second tactile output setting is active. In response to detecting the input associated with contact 5062, having an intensity level above threshold ITd, a menu associated with the “Users” folder (object 5004-6) is displayed in display 450 (an exemplary second display operation is performed). Figure 5Z also illustrates performance of this operation in conjunction with generating a second tactile output and without performing the first display operation (e.g., highlighting the “Users” folder).

[00264] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the third input (e.g., a deep press), and in accordance with a determination that the first tactile output setting is active (e.g., silent trackpad mode) for the third input, the device forgoes (732) generation of the second tactile output. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the third input and in accordance with the determination that the first tactile output setting is active (e.g., silent trackpad mode), the device forgoes (734) repeating the second operation. For example, as illustrated in Figure 5AA, tactile output setting chart 5060 indicates that the first tactile output setting is active. In response to detecting the input associated with contact 5062, having an intensity level above threshold ITd, the “Users” folder is not highlighted (an exemplary first display operation is not performed), and a menu associated with the “Users” folder (object 5004-6) is not displayed in display 450 (an exemplary second display operation is not performed). Figure 5AA also illustrates forgoing performance of the second operation in conjunction with forgoing generating any tactile output and without performing the first display operation (e.g., highlighting the “Users” folder).

[00265] In some embodiments, the second tactile output includes (736) an audible component that is louder than an audible component of the first tactile output. In some embodiments, the first tactile output has (738) a first tactile output intensity and the second tactile output has a second tactile output intensity that is greater than the first tactile output intensity.

[00266] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 7A-7D have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, and 900) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 700 described above with respect to Figures 7A-7D. For example, the contacts, inputs, operations, tactile output settings, tactile output intensity, intensity thresholds, regions and tactile outputs described above with reference to method 700 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, inputs, operations, tactile output settings, tactile output intensity, intensity thresholds, regions and tactile outputs described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 800, and 900). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00267] Figures 8A-8F illustrate a flow diagram of a method 800 of providing tactile outputs based on one or more regions of a user interface, in accordance with some embodiments. The method 800 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touchsensitive surface. Some operations in method 800 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[00268] As described below, the method 800 provides an intuitive way to provide tactile outputs based on one or more regions of a user interface. The method reduces the cognitive burden on a user when providing tactile outputs based on one or more regions of a user interface, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For batteryoperated electronic devices, enabling a user to provide tactile outputs based on one or more regions of a user interface faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[00269] The device displays (802), on the display of the electronic device, a user interface that includes a first region that is configured to initiate a first display operation in response to an input (e.g., a light press) (optionally, an input associated with the first region) that satisfies first activation criteria and initiate a second display operation in response to an input (e.g., a deep press) (optionally, an input associated with the first region) that satisfies second activation criteria distinct from the first activation criteria, and a second region that is distinct from the first region, wherein the second region is configured to initiate a third display operation in response to an input (optionally, an input associated with the second region) that satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., a light press) and the second region is not configured to initiate any display operation in response to an input (optionally, an input associated with the second region) that satisfies the second activation criteria (e.g., a deep press). For example, the first region is responsive to inputs that satisfy one or more first activation criteria and is also responsive to inputs that satisfy one or more second activation criteria, and the second region is responsive to inputs that satisfy the first activation criteria and is not responsive to inputs that satisfy the second activation criteria.

[00270] In some embodiments, the first activation criteria include (804) first intensity criteria. In some embodiments, the first intensity criteria include a first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the second activation criteria include (806) second intensity criteria distinct from the first intensity criteria. In some embodiments, the second intensity criteria include a second intensity threshold that is higher than the first intensity threshold.

[00271] In some embodiments, the first region is (808) a region that includes a user interface control and the second region is a region that does not include any user interface control. In some embodiments, the user interface includes (810) a plurality of regions that are configured to perform display operations in response to inputs that satisfy the second activation criteria, and (all other) regions of the user interface that are outside of the plurality of regions are not configured to perform display operations to inputs that satisfy the second activation criteria. In some embodiments, the second activation criteria are correspond to a unique form of input to which only certain controls and/or applications are configured to respond. However, in order to maintain a consistent feel for the user interface, the input device provides feedback to the user indicating that the second activation criteria have been met even when the input corresponds to a location outside of the controls or applications that are configured to respond to the second activation criteria.

[00272] While displaying the user interface of the first software application, the device performs at least the following operations. The device detects (812) a first input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the contact included in the first input is associated with the first region of the user interface.

[00273] In response to detecting the first input, and in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., a light press), the device performs (814) the first display operation. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input, in accordance with the determination that the first input satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., a light press), the device concurrently generates (816) a tactile output of a third type that is distinct from the tactile output of the first type while performing the first display operation. For example, as illustrated in Figure 5EE, region chart 5070 indicates that a detected contact is associated with the first region. In response to detecting the input associated with contact 5062, having an intensity level above threshold ITl, and below threshold ITd, the “Users” folder (object 5004-6) is highlighted (an exemplary first display operation is performed). Figure 5EE also illustrates performance of this operation in conjunction with generating a third tactile output.

[00274] In some embodiments, the tactile output of the third type is distinct from the tactile output of a second type, described below. In some embodiments, the tactile output of the third type (e.g., a tactile output indicating a light press) has less salience (818) than salience of the tactile output of the first type (e.g., a tactile output for a deep operation) and greater salience than salience of the tactile output of a second type (e.g., a tactile output indicating absence of a deep operation). In some embodiments, the salience of a tactile output includes one or more of: an amplitude of the tactile output (e.g., speed and force of a displacement of the touch-sensitive surface) and a duration of the tactile output.

[00275] In response to detecting the first input, and in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies the second activation criteria (e.g., a deep press), the device performs (820) the second display operation and concurrently generating a tactile output of a first type (e.g., a tactile output for a deep operation) while performing the second display operation. For example, as illustrated in Figure 5FF, region chart 5070 indicates that a detected contact is associated with the first region. In response to detecting the input associated with contact 5062, having an intensity level above threshold ITd, a menu associated with the “Users” folder (object 5004-6) is displayed (an exemplary second display operation is performed). Figure 5FF also illustrates performance of this operation in conjunction with generating a first tactile output. Figure 5FF also illustrates performance of this operation without performing the first display operation (e.g., highlighting the “Users” folder).

[00276] The device detects (822) a second input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the second input is distinct from the first input and the contact included in the second input is associated with the second region of the user interface.. For example, Figure 5GG illustrates a second input including contact 5074, associated with the file view control object 5008-1, and region chart 5070 indicates that the detected contact is associated with the second region.

[00277] In response to detecting the second input, and in accordance with a determination that the second input satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., a light press), the device performs (824) the third display operation. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input and in accordance with the determination that the second input satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., a light press), the device concurrently generates (826) a tactile output of a fourth type that is distinct from the tactile output of the third type while performing the third display operation. For example, as illustrated in Figure 5HH, region chart 5070 indicates that a detected contact is associated with the second region. In response to detecting the input associated with contact 5074, having an intensity level above threshold ITl, and below threshold ITd, the file view control icon 5008-1 is selected and region 5054 displays the contents of the “Macintosh HD” directory in an icon-view. Figure 5HH also illustrates performance of this operation in conjunction with generating a tactile output of a fourth type. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input and in accordance with the determination that the second input satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., a light press), the device concurrently generates (828) a tactile output of the third type while performing the third display operation.

[00278] In response to detecting the second input, and in accordance with a determination that the second input satisfies the second activation criteria (e.g., a deep press), the device generates (830) a tactile output of a second type (e.g., a tactile output indicating absence of a deep operation). In some embodiments, the tactile output of the second type is distinct (832) from the tactile output of the first type. In some embodiments, the tactile output of the second type is identical to the tactile output of the first type.

[00279] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input and in accordance with the determination that the second input satisfies the second activation criteria (e.g., a deep press), the device forgoes (834) performing the first display operation, the second display operation, and the third display operation. For example, as illustrated in Figure 511, region chart 5070 indicates that a detected contact is associated with the second region. In response to detecting the input associated with contact 5074, having an intensity level above threshold ITd, there is no display operation performed (e.g., there is no change in the display of the contents of display 450, from Figure 5HH). Figure 511 also illustrates forgoing performance of any display operation in conjunction with generating a tactile output of the second type. For example, in Figure 511, the tactile output of the second type indicates to the user of the device that there is no display operation associated with a “deep press” detected while the cursor is over the icon file control object.

[00280] In some embodiments, the tactile output of the second type (e.g., a tactile output indicating absence of a deep operation) has less salience (836) than salience of the tactile output of the first type (e.g., a tactile output for a deep operation).

[00281] In some embodiments, the user interface includes (838) a third region that is not configured to initiate any display operation in response to an input (associated with the third region) that satisfies first activation criteria and is not configured to initiate any display operation in response to an input (associated with the third region) that satisfies second activation criteria distinct from the first activation criteria (e.g., the third region is not responsive to inputs that satisfy the first activation criteria or the second activation criteria). Furthermore, in some embodiments, the device detects (840) a third input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the contact included in the first input is associated with the third region of the user interface.

[00282] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the third input, and in accordance with a determination that the third input satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., a light press), the device generates (842) a tactile output of the third type (e.g., a tactile output indicating a light press). For example, as illustrated in Figure 5JJ, region chart 5070 indicates that a detected contact is associated with the third region. In response to detecting the input associated with contact 5078, having an intensity level above threshold ITl and below ITd, there is no display operation performed. Figure 5JJ also illustrates forgoing performance of any display operation in conjunction with generating a tactile output of the third type. For example, in Figure 5JJ, the tactile output of the second type indicates to the user of the device that there is no display operation associated with a “light press” detected while the cursor is over control object 5008-4.

[00283] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the third input, and in accordance with a determination that the third input satisfies the second activation criteria (e.g., a deep press), the device generates (844) a tactile output of the second type (e.g., a tactile output indicating absence of a deep operation). For example, as illustrated in Figure 5KK, region chart 5070 indicates that a detected contact is associated with the third region. In response to detecting the input associated with contact 5078, having an intensity level above threshold ITd, there is no display operation performed. Figure 5KK also illustrates forgoing performance of any display operation in conjunction with generating a tactile output of the second type. For example, in Figure 5KK, the tactile output of the second type indicates to the user of the device that there is no display operation associated with a “deep press” detected while the cursor is over the control object 5008-4.

[00284] Thus, in some embodiments, the tactile output associated with a light press input is the same everywhere, while a tactile output associated with a deep press input is different depending on whether the portion of the user interface corresponding to the deep press input is configured to respond to the deep press input (e.g., so as to provide the user with an indication of which user interface elements are responsive to a deep press input and which user interface elements are not responsive to the deep press input).

[00285] In some embodiments, the device detects (846) an occurrence of a predefined event associated with the second region while the second region is not configured to initiate any display operation in response to an input (associated with the second region) that satisfies the second activation criteria (e.g., a deep press). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the occurrence of the predefined event, the device configures (848) the second region to initiate a fourth display operation in response to an input that satisfies the second activation criteria.

[00286] In some embodiments, while the second region is configured to initiate the fourth display operation in response to an input that satisfies the second activation criteria, the device detects (850) a fourth input that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface, wherein the contact included in the third input is associated with the second region of the user interface. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the fourth input, and in accordance with a determination that the fourth input satisfies the third activation criteria (e.g., a light press), the device performs (852) the third display operation. In some embodiments, in response to detecting the fourth input, and in accordance with a determination that the fourth input satisfies the second activation criteria (e.g., a deep press), the device performs (854) the fourth display operation and concurrently generates a tactile output of the first type (e.g., a tactile output for a deep operation) while performing the second display operation.

[00287] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input and in accordance with a determination that the first input does not satisfy the first activation criteria and does not satisfy the second activation criteria, the device forgoes (856) generating any tactile output, and in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input does not satisfy the first activation criteria and does not satisfy the second activation criteria, the device forgoes (858) generating any tactile output. [00288] In some embodiments, the user interface is generated (860) by a first application running on the device (e.g., a user facing application such as the user interface generating portion of an operating system, a file browser, a web browser, a mail application, etc.) and the determination as to whether to provide the first tactile output or the second tactile output when the second set of activation criteria are satisfied is made by a second application running on the device (e.g., firmware that controls a tactile output mechanism) that is distinct from the first application.

[00289] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 8A-8F have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 700, and 900) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 800 described above with respect to Figures

8A-8F. For example, the contacts, inputs, operations, activation criteria, salience, intensity thresholds, regions, tactile output types, and tactile outputs described above with reference to method 700 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, inputs, operations, activation criteria, salience, intensity thresholds, regions, tactile output types, and tactile outputs described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 700, and 900). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00290] Figures 9A-9C illustrate a flow diagram of a method 900 of configuring tactile outputs and activation criteria, in accordance with some embodiments. The method 900 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, and one or more tactile output generators. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and the touchsensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 900 are, optionally, combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

[00291] As described below, the method 900 provides an intuitive way to configure tactile outputs and activation criteria. The method reduces the number, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user when configuring tactile outputs and activation criteria, thereby creating a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated electronic devices, enabling a user to configure tactile outputs and activation criteria faster and more efficiently conserves power and increases the time between battery charges.

[00292] The device is configured to provide (902) a first tactile output (e.g., a hght press tactile output) in response to detecting that first activation criteria have been met (e.g., hght press activation criteria), the first activation criteria including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., selection of draggable object 5004-6 in response to intensity between ITl and ITd, as shown in Figure 5CC). The device is configured to provide (904) a second tactile output (e.g., a deep press tactile output) in response to detecting that second activation criteria have been met (e.g., deep press activation criteria), the second activation criteria including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface increases above a second intensity threshold, distinct from the first intensity threshold (e.g., display of menu 5064 in response to intensity above ITd, as shown in Figure 5DD).

[00293] The device displays (906), on the display, a settings user interface (e.g., the user interface illustrated in Figure 5MM or Figure 5NN) that includes one or more control objects, wherein the settings user interface is configured to adjust operations of the device that use: the one or more sensors that detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, and/or the one or more tactile output generators.

[00294] While displaying the settings user interface, the device detects (908) an input for a first control object of the one or more control objects (e.g., an input for a single, combined contact intensity/tactile output setting control). In some embodiments, the first control object is (910) a discrete control object that corresponds to a particular setting. For example, a check box that corresponds to a high, medium or low intensity/output setting (e.g., control objects 5088 in Figure 5MM). In some embodiments, the first control object is (912) a continuous control object that corresponds to three or more settings. For example, a virtual slider or a virtual dial that corresponds to a range of intensity/output settings, from a high setting to a low setting (e.g., control object 5089 in Figure 5NN).

[00295] In accordance with the detected input for the first control object, the device changes (914) the second intensity threshold (e.g., increasing or decreasing a magnitude of the second intensity threshold), and changes (916) the second tactile output (e.g., increasing or decreasing a magnitude, duration, frequency, salience, and/or other output characteristic of the second tactile output). In some embodiments, the second intensity threshold and the second tactile output are changed in response to detecting the input for the first control object. In some embodiments, the second intensity threshold and the second tactile output are changed as soon as the input for the first control object is detected. In some embodiments, the second intensity threshold and the second tactile output are changed by activating an “accept changes,” “set,” “exit,” or other similar icon in the settings user interface.

[00296] In some embodiments, in accordance with the detected input for the first control object, the device changes (918) the first intensity threshold (e.g., increasing or decreasing a magnitude of the first intensity threshold). In some embodiments, the magnitude of the first intensity threshold is changed in a same way and/or amount as the magnitude of the second intensity threshold (e.g., the first intensity threshold and the second intensity threshold are both increased by 15% or are both decreased by 15%, depending on the change in the setting indicated by the detected user input on the first control object). In some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is changed in response to detecting the input for the first control object. In some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is changed as soon as the input for the first control object is detected. In some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is changed by activating an “accept changes,” “set,” “exit,” or other similar icon in the settings user interface.

[00297] In some embodiments, in accordance with the detected input for the first control object, the device changes (920) the first tactile output (e.g., increasing or decreasing a magnitude, duration, frequency, salience, and/or other output characteristic of the first tactile output). In some embodiments, the characteristics of the first tactile output are changed in a same way and/or amount as the characteristics of the second tactile output (e.g., the amplitude of the first tactile output and the second tactile output are both increased by 15% or are both decreased by 15%, depending on the change in the setting indicated by the detected user input on the first control object). In some embodiments, the first tactile output is changed in response to detecting the input for the first control object. In some embodiments, the first tactile output is changed as soon as the input for the first control object is detected. In some embodiments, the first tactile output is changed by activating an “accept changes,” “set,” “exit,” or other similar icon in the settings user interface.

[00298] In some embodiments, in addition to the first tactile output and the second tactile output, the device is configured to provide other tactile outputs in response to detecting events associated with movement of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., providing tactile output “detents” in response to detecting movement on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to movement of a cursor on the display along a slider or over a boundary in a displayed user interface). Furthermore, in accordance with the detected input for the first control object, the device changes (922) the other tactile outputs (e.g., increasing or decreasing a magnitude, duration, frequency, salience, and/or other output characteristic of the other tactile outputs that the device is configured to provide). In some embodiments, the characteristics of the first tactile output, the second tactile output and the other tactile outputs are all changed in the same manner (e.g., all are increased in amplitude by 15% or all are decreased in amplitude by 15%, depending on the setting selected by the user with the input on the first control object). In some embodiments, the other tactile outputs are changed in response to detecting the input for the first control object. In some embodiments, the other tactile outputs are changed as soon as the input for the first control object is detected. In some embodiments, the other tactile outputs are by activating an “accept changes,” “set,” “exit,” or other similar icon in the settings user interface.

[00299] In some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is lower than the second intensity threshold. Thus, in some embodiments, the intensity of a new contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface will have to pass through the first intensity threshold to reach the second intensity threshold. Furthermore, the second activation criteria includes a time-based criterion that is dependent upon a time at which the first activation criteria is met, and in accordance with the detected input for the first control object, the device changes (924) the time-based criterion. In some embodiments, the device increases the length of a delay time period (e.g., the delay time between the time when the first activation criteria are met and the time when the second intensity threshold is met). In some embodiments, the device decreases the length of a delay time. In some embodiments, when the second intensity threshold is increased, a delay time in the time-based criterion is lengthened, and the duration, amplitude, and/or salience of the second tactile output are increased. In some embodiments, when the second intensity threshold is decreased, a delay time in the time-based criterion is shortened, and the duration, amplitude, and/or salience of the second tactile output are decreased. In some embodiments, the device has a reduced-sensitivity time period after the first activation criteria are met, during which the second intensity threshold is temporarily increased, and this reduced-sensitivity time period is increased or decreased in accordance with the detected input for the first control object. In some embodiments, the time-based criterion is changed in response to detecting the input for the first control object. In some embodiments, the timebased criterion is changed as soon as the input for the first control object is detected. In some embodiments, the time-based criterion is changed by activating an “accept changes,” “set,” “exit,” or other similar icon in the settings user interface.

[00300] In some embodiments, the time-based criterion includes a delay time period that occurs after the time at which the first activation criteria were met, and the time-based criterion is met (926) after the delay time period has elapsed. In some embodiments, the timebased criterion is met upon completion of the delay time period. For example, during the delay time period, the second activation criteria are not met, even if an intensity of the contact is above the second intensity threshold, to prevent accidental activation of the second tactile output.

[00301] In some embodiments, the second activation criteria include (928) a criterion that is met when the intensity of the contact increases by more than a predefined amount (e.g., and/or increases above the second intensity threshold) after the delay time period has elapsed. For example, in order to meet the second activation criteria, after the delay time period, the user has to increase the intensity of the contact by pressing harder.

[00302] In some embodiments, the second activation criteria include (930) a criterion that is met when the intensity of the contact increases from an intensity below the second intensity threshold to an intensity above the second intensity threshold after the delay time period has elapsed. For example, in order to meet the second activation criteria, if the contact intensity is already above the second intensity threshold at the end of the delay time period, the user has to back off and press again by reducing the intensity of their contact below the second intensity threshold and then increasing the intensity of their contact above the second intensity threshold.

[00303] In some embodiments, the time-based criterion includes (936, Figure 9C) one or more of: a first offset that decreases over time (e.g., the decaying intensity threshold offset illustrated in the left intensity diagram in Figure 5PP); and a second offset that changes over time based on an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., the trailing force intensity threshold offset illustrated in the center intensity diagram in Figure 5PP). In some embodiments, the first offset decreases over time from the time at which the first activation criteria are satisfied. In some embodiments, the first offset decreases over time after a predefined duration from the time at which the first activation criteria are satisfied.

[00304] In some embodiments, the time-based criterion includes (938) an intensity offset for a user that is determined based on multiple separate inputs (e.g., inputs that are not continuous extensions of one another) on the touch-sensitive surface by the user. For example, as explained above with respect to Figure 5QQ, for a user who has a tendency to provide high intensity inputs, an intensity offset for the user is used to increase the deep activation intensity threshold, thereby reducing unintentional activation of a deep press operation. In some embodiments, the intensity offset for the user is determined based on the user’s historical inputs (e.g., prior inputs). In some embodiments, the intensity offset for the user is determined prior to detecting the contact on the touch-sensitive surface that is processed to determine whether to provide the second tactile output.

[00305] In some embodiments, the intensity offset for the user is determined (940) based on one or more of: peak intensities of a first predefined number of separate click inputs on the touch-sensitive surface by the user (e.g., peak intensities of clicks made by the user), and peak intensities of a second predefined number of separate drag inputs on the touchsensitive surface by the user (e.g., peak intensities during drag inputs made by the user). For example, peak intensities of the prior 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 90 click inputs by the user, and/or peak intensities during the prior 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 90 drag inputs by the user are used to determine the intensity offset for the user in some embodiments. In some embodiments, peak intensities of click inputs that satisfy the first intensity threshold and that do not satisfy the second intensity threshold are used for determining the intensity offset for the user (e.g., peak intensities of click inputs that satisfy the second intensity threshold are excluded). In some embodiments, peak intensities of click inputs that remain in contact with the touch-sensitive surface for a duration longer than a predefined duration threshold (e.g., 0.1 s, 0.2 s, 0.3 s, 0.4 s, 0.5 s, 0.6 s, 0.7 s, 0.8 s, 0.9 s, 1 s, 2 s, 3 s, 4 s, 5 s, etc.) are excluded from determining the intensity offset for the user. In some embodiments, the first predefined number is the same as the second predefined number. In some embodiments, the first predefined number is distinct from the second predefined number. [00306] In some embodiments, the peak intensities of prior click inputs by the user are compared to a reference intensity of a click input (e.g., an average or median intensity of click inputs made by multiple users) to determine the intensity offset for the user. In some embodiments, the peak intensities of prior drag inputs by the user are compared to a reference intensity of a drag input (e.g., an average or median intensity of drag inputs made by multiple users) to determine the intensity offset for the user. In some embodiments, the reference intensity of a click input and/or the reference intensity of a drag input are/is adjusted based on the user input on the settings user interface. For example, when a low deep press intensity is selected (e.g., from the settings user interface illustrated in Figure 5MM), a reference intensity of a low intensity click input and/or a reference intensity of a low intensity drag input are used. Similarly, when a high deep press intensity is selected, a reference intensity of a high intensity click input and/or a reference intensity of a high intensity drag input are used.

[00307] In some embodiments, the time-based criterion includes (932, Figure 9B) a reduced-sensitivity time period that occurs after the time at which the first activation criteria are satisfied, and during the reduced-sensitivity time period, the second intensity threshold is increased. For example, during the reduced-sensitivity period, the second intensity threshold is temporarily increased to prevent accidental activation of the second tactile output.

[00308] In some embodiments, the device is configured (934) to respond to the satisfaction of the first activation criteria with a first type of operation (e.g., a light/primary activation), and the device is configured to respond to the satisfaction of the second activation criteria with a second type of operation (e.g., a deep/altemative activation) that is different from the first type of operation.

[00309] In some embodiments, while displaying a first user interface and while the device is in a first haptic output mode of a plurality of haptic output modes, the device provides a first haptic output (e.g., a light press haptic output) in response to detecting that first activation criteria (e.g., light press activation criteria) for the first haptic output mode have been met, the first activation criteria for the first haptic output mode including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface increases above a first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the device also provides a second haptic output (e.g., a deep press haptic output) in response to detecting that second activation criteria (e.g., deep press activation criteria) for the first haptic output mode have been met, the second activation criteria for the first haptic output mode including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface increases above a second intensity threshold.

[00310] In some embodiments, the device displays a settings user interface for controlling operation of the touch-sensitive surface, the settings user interface including a plurality of control objects, and while displaying the settings user interface, the device detects an input associated with a control object of the plurality of control objects in the settings user interface (e.g., an intensity/output setting control).

[00311] In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input associated with the single control in the settings user interface, the device exits the first haptic output mode and enters a second haptic output mode, of the plurality of haptic output modes, that is distinct from the first haptic output mode, and while displaying a second user interface and while the device is in the second haptic output mode, the device provides a third haptic output (e.g., a deep press haptic output) in response to detecting that second activation criteria (e.g., deep press activation criteria) for the second haptic output mode have been met, the second activation criteria for the second haptic output mode including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface increases above a third intensity threshold, wherein the third intensity threshold is distinct from the second intensity threshold, and a salience (e.g., magnitude, duration, frequency) of the third haptic output is distinct from the second haptic output.

[00312] It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations in Figures 9A-9C have been described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art would recognize various ways to reorder the operations described herein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 700, and 800) are also applicable in an analogous manner to method 900 described above with respect to Figures 9A-9C. For example, the contacts, inputs, operations, tactile output settings, tactile output intensity, intensity thresholds, contact intensity, time-based criteria, control objects, and tactile outputs described above with reference to method 900 optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts, inputs, operations, tactile output settings, tactile output intensity, intensity thresholds, contact intensity, time-based criteria, control objects, and tactile outputs described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 600, 700, and 800). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

[00313] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 10 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1000 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 10 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[00314] As shown in Figure 10, an electronic device 1000 includes a display unit 1002 configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 configured to receive contacts, one or more sensor units 1006 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004; optionally, one or more tactile output units 1007 configured to provide tactile outputs, and a processing unit 1008 coupled with the display unit 1002, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 and the one or more sensor units 1006. In some embodiments, the processing unit 1008 includes: a display enablement unit 1010, a contact detection unit 1012, a contact movement detection unit 1014, an object movement unit 1016, an operation performance unit 1018, a focus-selector movement unit 1020, a portion changing unit 1022, an object distinguishing unit 1024, an intensity determining unit 1026, an object selection determination unit 1028, and a time measurement unit 1030.

[00315] The processing unit 1008 is configured to: enable display (e.g., with the display enablement unit 1010) of a user interface of a first software application that includes one or more draggable objects and one or more control objects distinct from the one or more draggable objects; and, while enabling display of the user interface of the first software application: detect a contact (e.g., with the contact detection unit 1012) on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 at a first location while a focus selector is displayed over a first draggable object of the one or more draggable objects displayed on the display unit 1002. The processing unit 1008 is also configured to: after detecting the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 at the first location, detect a movement of the contact (e.g., with the contact movement detection unit 1014) across the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 to a second location that corresponds to a first control object of the one or more control objects displayed on the display unit 1002; and, in response to detecting movement of the contact from the first location to the second location, in accordance with a determination that the contact at the first location satisfies object selection criteria (e.g., with object selection determination unit 1028), move the first draggable object (e.g., with the object movement unit 1016) to the first control object in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 to the first control object; and, in accordance with a determination that the contact at the second location satisfies first intensity criteria (e.g., with intensity determination unit 1026), perform a first predetermined operation (e.g., with the operation performance unit 1018) that corresponds to activation of the first control object.

[00316] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1008 is further configured to: in accordance with a determination that the contact at the first location does not satisfy the object selection criteria (e.g., with object selection determination unit 1028), move the focus selector (e.g., with the focus-selector movement unit 1020) to the first control object in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 to the first control object without moving the first draggable object to the first control object; and, in accordance with a determination that the contact at the second location satisfies the second intensity criteria (e.g., with intensity determination unit 1026), perform the first predetermined operation (e.g., with the operation performance unit 1018) that corresponds to activation of the first control object without moving the first draggable object to the first control object.

[00317] In some embodiments, a first portion of the multiple distinct portions includes the first control object, and the user interface includes multiple distinct portions, and the processing unit 1008 is further configured to: perform the first predetermined operation (e.g., with the operation performance unit 1018) that corresponds to activation of the first control object including changing a second portion (e.g., with the portion changing unit 1022), distinct from the first portion, of the multiple distinct portions.

[00318] In some embodiments, the first software application is a calendar application, the user interface of the first software application includes multiple time-period user interface elements in the first portion, the one or more draggable objects are one or more calendar entry objects, a respective time-period user interface element of the multiple time-period user interface elements corresponds to a predefined unit of time, the second portion of the user interface of the first software application, prior to the determination that the contact at the second location satisfies the first intensity criteria (e.g., with the intensity determination unit 1026), includes a calendar view that corresponds to a first unit of time, and changing the second portion includes replacing the calendar view (e.g., with the display enablement unit

1010) that corresponds to a first unit of time with a calendar view that corresponds to a second unit of time that is distinct from the first unit of time.

[00319] In some embodiments, the first software application is a file system navigation application, the user interface of the first software application includes multiple file view control objects in the first portion, the one or more draggable objects are one or more of file icons and/or folder icons, a respective file view control object of the multiple file view control objects corresponds to a distinct file view type, the second portion of the user interface, prior to the determination that the contact at the second location satisfies the first intensity criteria (e.g., with intensity determination unit 1026), includes a file view of a first file view type and changing the second portion (e.g., with portion changing unit 1022) includes replacing the file view (e.g., with display enablement unit 1010) of the first file view type with a file view of a second file view type that is distinct from the file view of the first file view type.

[00320] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1008 is further configured to: subsequent to moving the first draggable object to the first control object and changing the second portion: detect a movement of the contact (e.g., with the contact movement detection unit 1014) across the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 to a third location that corresponds to the changed second portion on the display unit 1002; move the first draggable object (e.g., with the object movement unit 1016) to a location, in the changed second portion, that corresponds to the third location on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 in accordance with the movement of the contact (e.g., with the contact movement detection unit 1014) across the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 to the third location; and, in accordance with a determination that the contact at the third location does not satisfy the object selection criteria (e.g., with the object selection determination unit 1028), drop the first draggable object at the location (e.g., with the display enablement unit 1010), in the changed second portion, that corresponds to the third location on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004.

[00321] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1008 is further configured to: in response to moving the first draggable object to the first control object, and in accordance with a determination that the first software application is configured to perform the first predetermined operation in response to detecting a contact at the second location that satisfies the first intensity criteria, visually distinguish (e.g., with the object distinguishing unit 1024) the first control object prior to determining that the contact satisfies the first intensity criteria (e.g., with intensity determination unit 1026).

[00322] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1008 is further configured to: detect a movement of the contact (e.g., with contact movement detection unit 1014) across the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 to a fourth location that corresponds to a second control object of the one or more control objects; and, in accordance with a determination that the first software application is not configured to perform a predetermined operation in response to detecting a contact at the fourth location that satisfies the first intensity criteria (e.g., with intensity determination unit 1026), forgo visually distinguishing (e.g., with object distinguishing unit 1024) the second control object.

[00323] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1008 is further configured to: concurrently enable display (e.g., with display enablement unit 1010) of an entirety of the user interface of the first software application with a portion of a user interface of a second software application adjacent to the user interface of the first software application; and in accordance with the determination that the contact at the first location satisfies the object selection criteria (e.g., with object selection determination unit 1028): detect a movement of the contact (e.g., with contact movement detection unit 1014) across the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 to a fifth location that corresponds to the displayed portion of the user interface of the second software application on the display unit 1002; move the first draggable object (e.g., with object movement unit 1016) to the displayed portion of the user interface of the second software application in accordance with the movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit 1004 to the fifth location; and in response to a determination that the contact at the fifth location satisfies the first intensity criteria (e.g., with the intensity determination unit 1026), enable replacement of a concurrent display (e.g., with display enablement unit 1010) of the entirety of the user interface of the first software application and the portion of the user interface of the second software application with a concurrent display of an entirety of the user interface of the second software application and a portion of the user interface of the first software application adjacent to the user interface of the second software application.

[00324] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1008 is further configured to: in response to a determination that the contact at the fifth location does not satisfy the first intensity criteria: determine a time period during which the contact remains at the fifth location (e.g., with time measurement unit 1030); and in response to a determination that the time period satisfies time-based activation criteria (e.g., with time measurement unit 1030), enable replacement of the concurrent display (e.g., with display enablement unit 1010) of the entirety of the user interface of the first software application and the portion of the user interface of the second software application with the concurrent display of an entirety of the user interface of the second software application and the portion of the user interface of the first software application adjacent to the user interface of the second software application. [00325] The operations described above with reference to Figures 6A-6E are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1 A-IB or Figure 10. For example, contact-detection operation 604, contact movement detection operation 606, and object-movement operation 612 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[00326] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 11 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1100 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 11 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[00327] As shown in Figure 11, an electronic device 1100 includes a display unit 1102 configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 configured to receive contacts, one or more sensor units 1106 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104, one or more tactile output units 1124 configured to provide tactile outputs, and a processing unit 1108 coupled with the display unit 1102, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 and the one or more sensor units 1106. In some embodiments, the processing unit 1108 includes: a display enablement unit 1110, an input detection unit 1112, a tactile output generation unit 1114, a contact detection unit 1116, an operation performance unit 1118, a tactile output setting determination unit 1120, and intensity determining unit 1122.

[00328] The processing unit 1108 is configured to: enable display (e.g., with display enablement unit 1110) of a user interface of a first software application; and, while enabling display of the user interface of the first software application: detect a first input (e.g., with input detection unit 1112) that includes a contact detected (e.g., with contact detection unit 1116) on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104, wherein the contact included in the first input is associated with a respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with a first operation and a second operation.

[00329] The processing unit 1108 is also configured to: in response to detecting the first input (e.g., with input detection unit 1112) and in accordance with a determination that a first tactile output setting (e.g., with tactile output setting determination unit 1120) is active for the first input, perform the first operation (e.g., operation performance unit 1118) without generating a tactile output; and in accordance with a determination that a second tactile output setting is active for the first input, forgo performing the first operation.

[00330] The processing unit 1108 is also configured to: detect a second input (e.g., with input detection unit 1112) that includes a contact detected (e.g., with contact detection unit 1116) on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104, wherein the contact included in the second input is associated with the respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with the first operation and the second operation and the second input is different from the first input; and in response to detecting the second input (e.g., with input detection unit 1112) and in accordance with a determination that the second tactile output setting is active (e.g., with tactile output setting determination unit 1120) for the second input, perform the first operation (e.g., operation performance unit 1118) in conjunction with generating a first tactile output (e.g., with tactile output generation unit 1114) associated with the first operation; and in accordance with a determination that the first tactile output setting is active (e.g., with tactile output setting determination unit

1120) for the second input, perform the second operation (e.g., operation performance unit

1118).

[00331] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1108 is further configured to: detect a third input (e.g., with input detection unit 1112) that includes a contact detected (e.g., with contact detection unit 1116) on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104, wherein the contact included in the third input is associated with the respective region of the user interface of the first software application that is associated with the first operation and the second operation and the third input is different from the first input and the second input; and in response to detecting the third input and in accordance with a determination that the second tactile output setting is active (e.g., with tactile output setting determination unit 1120) for the third input, perform the second operation (e.g., operation performance unit 1118) in conjunction with generating a second tactile output (e.g., with tactile output generation unit 1114) associated with the second operation; and in accordance with a determination that the first tactile output setting is active (e.g., with tactile output setting determination unit 1120) for the third input, forgo generation of the second tactile output.

[00332] In some embodiments, the second tactile output includes an audible component that is louder than an audible component of the first tactile output. In some embodiments, the first tactile output has a first tactile output intensity and the second tactile output has a second tactile output intensity that is greater than the first tactile output intensity. In some embodiments, the processing unit 1108 is further configured to, in response to detecting the third input (e.g., with input detection unit 1112), in accordance with the determination that the first tactile output setting is active (e.g., with tactile output setting determination unit 1120), forgo repeating the second operation.

[00333] In some embodiments, the contact in the second input and the contact in the third input are a same contact that is continuously detected (e.g., with contact detection unit 1116) on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1104 between the second input and the third input.

In some embodiments, the contact in the second input satisfies a first intensity threshold (e.g., using intensity determination unit 1122) and the contact in the third input satisfies a second intensity threshold that is higher than the first intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the processing unit 1108 is further configured to, in response to detecting the second input (e.g., with input detection unit 1112), in accordance with the determination that the first tactile output setting is active for the second input (e.g., with tactile output setting determination unit 1120), perform the second operation without performing the first operation (e.g., operation performance unit 1118).

[00334] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1108 is further configured to, in response to detecting the second input (e.g., with input detection unit 1112), in accordance with the determination that the first tactile output setting is active (e.g., with tactile output setting determination unit 1120) for the second input, forgo generation of the first tactile output. In some embodiments, the processing unit 1108 is further configured to, in response to detecting the second input (e.g., with input detection unit 1112), in accordance with the determination that the first tactile output setting is active for the second input (e.g., with tactile output setting determination unit 1120), forgo generation of a second tactile output associated with the second operation. In some embodiments, the first tactile output lasts for less than a predetermined time.

[00335] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application specific chips.

[00336] The operations described above with reference to Figures 7A-7D are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 11. For example, input-detection operation 704, and tactile output generation operation 712 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[00337] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 12 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1200 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 12 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments.

Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[00338] As shown in Figure 12, an electronic device 1200 includes a display unit 1202 configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1204 configured to receive contacts, one or more sensor units 1206 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1204; and a processing unit 1208 coupled with the display unit 1202, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1204 and the one or more sensor units 1206. In some embodiments, the processing unit 1208 includes: a display enablement unit 1210, an input detection unit 1212, a tactile output generation unit 1214, a contact detection unit 1216, a display operation performance unit 1218, an activation criteria determination unit 1220, an intensity determination unit 1222 and an event occurrence detection unit 1224.

[00339] The processing unit 1208 is configured to: enable display (e.g., with display enablement unit 1110) of a user interface that includes a first region that is configured to initiate a first display operation in response to an input that satisfies first activation criteria and initiate a second display operation in response to an input that satisfies second activation criteria distinct from the first activation criteria, and a second region that is distinct from the first region, wherein the second region is configured to initiate a third display operation in response to an input that satisfies the first activation criteria and the second region is not configured to initiate any display operation in response to an input that satisfies the second activation criteria.

[00340] While enabling display of the user interface, the processing unit 1208 is also configured to detect a first input (e.g., with the input detection unit 1212) that includes a contact detected (e.g., with the contact detection unit 1216) on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1204, wherein the contact included in the first input is associated with the first region of the user interface.

[00341] The processing unit 1208 is also configured to: in response to detecting the first input, in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., with the activation criteria determination unit 1220), perform the first display operation (e.g., with the display operation performance unit 1218); and in accordance with a determination that the first input satisfies the second activation criteria, perform the second display operation and concurrently generate a tactile output of a first type (e.g., with the tactile output generation unit 1214) while performing the second display operation.

[00342] The processing unit 1208 is also configured to: detect a second input (e.g., with the input detection unit 1212) that includes a contact detected (e.g., with the contact detection unit 1216) on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1204, wherein the second input is distinct from the first input and the contact included in the second input is associated with the second region of the user interface.

[00343] The processing unit 1208 is also configured to: in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., with the activation criteria determination unit 1220), perform the third display operation (e.g., with the display operation performance unit 1218), and in accordance with a determination that the second input satisfies the second activation criteria, generate (e.g., with the tactile output generation unit 1214) a tactile output of a second type. In some embodiments, the tactile output of the second type is distinct from the tactile output of the first type.

[00344] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1208 is further configured to: in response to detecting the first input and in accordance with the determination that the first input satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., with the activation criteria determination unit 1220), concurrently generate (e.g., with the tactile output generation unit 1214) a tactile output of a third type that is distinct from the tactile output of the first type while performing the first display operation (e.g., with the display operation performance unit 1218).

[00345] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1208 is further configured to: in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with the determination that the second input satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., with the activation criteria determination unit 1220), concurrently generate a tactile output of a fourth type (e.g., with the tactile output generation unit 1214) that is distinct from the tactile output of the third type while performing the third display operation (e.g., with the display operation performance unit 1218).

[00346] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1208 is further configured to: in response to detecting the second input, in accordance with the determination that the second input satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., with the activation criteria determination unit 1220), concurrently generating a tactile output of the third type (e.g., with the tactile output generation unit 1214) while performing the third display operation (e.g., with the display operation performance unit 1218).

[00347] In some embodiments, the user interface includes a third region that is not configured to initiate any display operation in response to an input that satisfies first activation criteria and is not configured to initiate any display operation in response to an input that satisfies second activation criteria distinct from the first activation criteria, and the processing unit 1208 is further configured to: detect a third input (e.g., with the input detection unit 1212) that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1204, wherein the contact included in the first input is associated with the third region of the user interface, and in response to detecting the third input, in accordance with a determination that the third input satisfies the first activation criteria (e.g., with the activation criteria determination unit 1220), generate a tactile output of the third type (e.g., with the tactile output generation unit 1214), and in accordance with a determination that the third input satisfies the second activation criteria (e.g., with the activation criteria determination unit 1220), generate a tactile output of the second type (e.g., with the tactile output generation unit 1214).

[00348] In some embodiments, the tactile output of the second type has less salience than salience of the tactile output of the first type. In some embodiments, the tactile output of the third type has less salience than salience of the tactile output of the first type and greater salience than salience of the tactile output of the second type. In some embodiments, the first activation criteria include first intensity criteria. In some embodiments, the second activation criteria include second intensity criteria distinct from the first intensity criteria. In some embodiments, the first region is a region that includes a user interface control and the second region is a region that does not include any user interface control.

[00349] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1208 is further configured to: in response to detecting the first input (e.g., with the input detection unit 1212), in accordance with a determination that the first input does not satisfy the first activation criteria and does not satisfy the second activation criteria (e.g., with the activation criteria determination unit 1220), forgo generating any tactile output, and in response to detecting the second input (e.g., with the input detection unit 1212), in accordance with a determination that the second input does not satisfy the first activation criteria and does not satisfy the second activation criteria (e.g., with the activation criteria determination unit 1220), forgo generating any tactile output. [00350] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1208 is further configured to: detect an occurrence of a predefined event associated with the second region while the second region is not configured to initiate any display operation in response to an input that satisfies the second activation criteria, in response to detecting the occurrence of the predefined event, configure the second region to initiate a fourth display operation in response to an input that satisfies the second activation criteria. Furthermore, in some embodiments, the processing unit 1208 is further configured to: while the second region is configured to initiate the fourth display operation in response to an input that satisfies the second activation criteria, detect a fourth input (e.g., with the input detection unit 1212) that includes a contact detected on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1204, wherein the contact included in the third input is associated with the second region of the user interface, and in response to detecting the fourth input (e.g., with the input detection unit 1212), in accordance with a determination that the fourth input satisfies the third activation criteria (e.g., with the activation criteria determination unit 1220), perform the third display operation, and in accordance with a determination that the fourth input satisfies the second activation criteria, perform the fourth display operation and concurrently generate a tactile output of the first type (e.g., with the tactile output generation unit 1214) while performing the second display operation (e.g., with the display operation performance unit 1218).

[00351] In some embodiments, the user interface includes a plurality of regions that are configured to perform display operations in response to inputs that satisfy the second activation criteria, and regions of the user interface that are outside of the plurality of regions are not configured to perform display operations to inputs that satisfy the second activation criteria. In some embodiments, the user interface is generated by a first application running on the device and the determination as to whether to provide the first tactile output or the second tactile output when the second set of activation criteria are satisfied is made by a second application running on the device that is distinct from the first application.

[00352] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application specific chips.

[00353] The operations described above with reference to Figures 8A-8F are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 12. For example, input-detection operation 812, and tactile output generation operation 820 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected,

100 event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[00354] In accordance with some embodiments, Figure 13 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 1300 configured in accordance with the principles of the various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of the various described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill in the art that the functional blocks described in Figure 13 are, optionally, combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further definition of the functional blocks described herein.

[00355] As shown in Figure 13, an electronic device 1300 includes a display unit 1302 configured to display a user interface, a touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 configured to receive contacts, one or more sensor units 1306 configured to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304; one or more tactile output units 1332 configured to provide tactile outputs; and a processing unit 1308 coupled with the display unit 1302, the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 the one or more sensor units 1306 and the one or more tactile output units 1332. In some embodiments, the processing unit 1308 includes: a display enablement unit 1310, an input detection unit 1312, a tactile output generation unit 1314, a contact movement detection unit 1316, an operation performance unit 1318, an activation criteria determination unit 1320, an intensity determination unit 1322, an intensity threshold changing unit 1324, a tactile output changing unit 1326, a time-based criterion changing unit 1328, and an event occurrence detection unit 1330.

[00356] The one or more tactile output units 1332 are configured to: provide a first tactile output in response to detecting that first activation criteria have been met, the first activation criteria including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on the touchsensitive surface unit 1304 increases above a first intensity threshold and provide a second tactile output in response to detecting that second activation criteria have been met, the second activation criteria including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on

101 the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 increases above a second intensity threshold, distinct from the first intensity threshold.

[00357] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1308 is configured to: provide a first tactile output (e.g., with the tactile output generation unit 1314) in response to detecting that first activation criteria have been met (e.g., with activation criteria determination unit 1320), the first activation criteria including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 increases above a first intensity threshold (e.g., using intensity determination unit 1322) and provide a second tactile output (e.g., with the tactile output generation unit 1314) in response to detecting that second activation criteria have been met (e.g., with activation criteria determination unit 1320), the second activation criteria including a criterion that is met when an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 increases above a second intensity threshold, distinct from the first intensity threshold (e.g., using intensity determination unit 1322).

[00358] The processing unit 1308 is also configured to: enable display (e.g., with display enablement unit 1308) of a settings user interface that includes one or more control objects, wherein the settings user interface is configured to adjust operations of the device that use: the one or more sensors that detect intensity of contacts (e.g., one or more sensor units 1306) with the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304, and/or the one or more tactile output generators (e.g., one or more tactile output units 1332). The processing unit 1308 is configured to, while enabling display of the settings user interface: detect an input (e.g., with input detection unit 1312) for a first control object of the one or more control objects, and in accordance with the detected input for the first control object, change the second intensity threshold (e.g., with intensity threshold changing unit 1324) and change the second tactile output (e.g., with tactile output changing unit 1326).

[00359] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1308 is further configured to: in accordance with the detected input for the first control object, change the first intensity threshold (e.g., with intensity threshold changing unit 1324). In some embodiments, the processing unit 1308 is further configured to: in accordance with the detected input for the first control object, change the first tactile output (e.g., with tactile output changing unit 1326).

[00360] In some embodiments, the processing unit 1308 is further configured to:

provide other tactile outputs (e.g., with tactile output generation unit 1314) in response to detecting events associated with movement of a contact (e.g., with contact movement detection unit 1316) on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304, and in accordance with the

102 detected input for the first control object, change the other tactile outputs (e.g., with tactile output changing unit 1326).

[00361] In some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is lower than the second intensity threshold, the second activation criteria includes a time-based criterion that is dependent upon a time at which the first activation criteria is met, and the processing unit 1308 is further configured to: in accordance with the detected input for the first control object, change the time-based criterion (e.g., with time-based criterion changing unit 1328).

In some embodiments, the time-based criterion includes a delay time period that occurs after the time at which the first activation criteria were met, and the time-based criterion is met after the delay time period has elapsed.

[00362] In some embodiments, the second activation criteria include a criterion that is met (e.g., using activation criteria determination unit 1320) when the intensity of the contact increases by more than a predefined amount after the delay time period has elapsed. In some embodiments, the second activation criteria include a criterion that is met (e.g., using activation criteria determination unit 1320) when the intensity of the contact increases from an intensity below the second intensity threshold to an intensity above the second intensity threshold (e.g., using intensity determination unit 1322) after the delay time period has elapsed.

[00363] In some embodiments, the time-based criterion includes a reduced-sensitivity time period that occurs after the time at which the first activation criteria are satisfied, and during the reduced-sensitivity time period, the second intensity threshold is increased. In some embodiments, the device is configured to respond to the satisfaction of the first activation criteria with a first type of operation (e.g., with operation performance unit 1318), and the device is configured to respond to the satisfaction of the second activation criteria with a second type of operation (e.g., with operation performance unit 1318) that is different from the first type of operation.

[00364] In some embodiments, the time-based criterion includes one or more of: a first offset that decreases over time; and a second offset that changes over time based on an intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304.

[00365] In some embodiments, the time-based criterion includes an intensity offset for a user that is determined based on multiple separate inputs on the touch-sensitive surface unit

1304 by the user.

[00366] In some embodiments, the intensity offset for the user is determined based on one or more of: peak intensities of a first predefined number of separate click inputs on the

103 touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 by the user, and peak intensities of a second predefined number of separate drag inputs on the touch-sensitive surface unit 1304 by the user.

[00367] In some embodiments, the first control object is a discrete control object that corresponds to a particular setting and in some embodiments, the first control object is a continuous control object that corresponds to three or more settings.

[00368] The operations in the information processing methods described above are, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in information processing apparatus such as general purpose processors (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or application specific chips.

[00369] The operations described above with reference to Figures 9A-9C are, optionally, implemented by components depicted in Figures 1 A-IB or Figure 13. For example, intensity-threshold changing operation 914, and tactile output changing operation 920 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a respective predefined event or subevent is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B.

[00370] The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in view of the above teachings. The embodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical applications, to thereby enable others skilled in the art to best use the invention and various described embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated.

104

Every citation, both ways

Citations
Document	Relation	Office	Category	Cited during	Relevant claims
US2011248948A1	Cites	United States of America	XAY	Search report	101-103,105-126,128-138
US2015067602A1	Cites	United States of America	XAY	Search report	1-100

406 members in 14 offices

This recordMember, by publication datePriority claim4 more offices are in the list below

Priority claims12

Priority claims
Document	Office	Kind	Date
201562129958	United States of America	P	2015-03-08
201562129958	United States of America	P	2015-03-08
201562141818	United States of America	P	2015-04-01
201562141818	United States of America	P	2015-04-01
201514868078	United States of America	A	2015-09-28
201514868078	United States of America	A	2015-09-28
14868078	–	–	–
62129958	–	–	–
62141818	–	–	–
US201514868078	–	–	–
US201562129958P	–	–	–
US201562141818P	–	–	–

Members406

Family members, oldest first
Document	Office	Kind
US2006072856A1	United States of America	A1	2006-04-06
US2007110062A1	United States of America	A1	2007-05-17
US7499419B2	United States of America	B2	2009-03-03
US2009225754A1	United States of America	A1	2009-09-10
US2010142527A1	United States of America	A1	2010-06-10
US7881244B2	United States of America	B2	2011-02-01
US2011122872A1	United States of America	A1	2011-05-26
US8213347B2	United States of America	B2	2012-07-03
US8369258B2	United States of America	B2	2013-02-05
US2013156033A1	United States of America	A1	2013-06-20
US8953513B2	United States of America	B2	2015-02-10
US2015156234A1	United States of America	A1	2015-06-04
US2015280929A1	United States of America	A1	2015-10-01
US9166805B1	United States of America	B1	2015-10-20
US9167016B2	United States of America	B2	2015-10-20
US2016020994A1	United States of America	A1	2016-01-21
AU2016100247A4	Australia	A4	2016-04-07
AU2016100253A4	Australia	A4	2016-04-07
AU2016100254A4	Australia	A4	2016-04-07
US9319303B2	United States of America	B2	2016-04-19
AU2016100649A4	Australia	A4	2016-06-16
AU2016100652A4	Australia	A4	2016-06-16
AU2016100653A4	Australia	A4	2016-06-16
DE202016001489U1	Germany	U1	2016-06-16
AU2016100247B4	Australia	B4	2016-06-23
DE202016001516U1	Germany	U1	2016-06-30
AU2016100652B4	Australia	B4	2016-08-04
US2016226670A1	United States of America	A1	2016-08-04
AU2016100649B4	Australia	B4	2016-08-18
AU2016100653B4	Australia	B4	2016-08-18
AU2016101201A4	Australia	A4	2016-08-18
AU2016101431A4	Australia	A4	2016-09-08
AU2016101433A4	Australia	A4	2016-09-08
AU2016101435A4	Australia	A4	2016-09-08
AU2016101436A4	Australia	A4	2016-09-08
AU2016101437A4	Australia	A4	2016-09-08
AU2016101438A4	Australia	A4	2016-09-08
US2016259413A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
US2016259495A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
US2016259496A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
US2016259497A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
US2016259498A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
US2016259499A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
US2016259516A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
US2016259517A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
US2016259518A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
US2016259519A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
US2016259527A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
US2016259528A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
US2016259536A1	United States of America	A1	2016-09-08
WO2016144577A1	World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO)	A1	2016-09-15
WO2016144696A2	World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO)	A2	2016-09-15
WO2016144975A2	World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO)	A2	2016-09-15
DE202016002906U1	Germany	U1	2016-09-19
DE202016002907U1	Germany	U1	2016-09-19
DE202016002908U1	Germany	U1	2016-09-19
DK201500595A1	Denmark	A1	2016-09-19
DK201500597A1	Denmark	A1	2016-09-19
CN105955591A	China	A	2016-09-21
CN105955641A	China	A	2016-09-21
DK178630B1	Denmark	B1	2016-09-26
DK201500575A1	Denmark	A1	2016-09-26
DK201500588A1	Denmark	A1	2016-09-26
DK201500592A1	Denmark	A1	2016-09-26
DK201500596A1	Denmark	A1	2016-09-26
DK201500601A1	Denmark	A1	2016-09-26
DK201670594A1	Denmark	A1	2016-09-26
CN205608689U	China	U	2016-09-28
AU2016203040A1	Australia	A1	2016-09-29
AU2016101418A4	Australia	A4	2016-10-06
AU2016231505A1	Australia	A1	2016-10-06
US2016291770A1	United States of America	A1	2016-10-06
US2016291771A1	United States of America	A1	2016-10-06
DK201500600A1	Denmark	A1	2016-10-10
NL2016375A	Netherlands (Kingdom of the)	A	2016-10-10
NL2016376AThis record	Netherlands (Kingdom of the)	A	2016-10-10
AU2016101436B4	Australia	B4	2016-10-20
CN205665680U	China	U	2016-10-26
EP3084578A2	European Patent Office (EPO)	A2	2016-10-26
WO2016144975A3	World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO)	A3	2016-10-27
AU2016231472B1	Australia	B1	2016-11-10
AU2016231540B1	Australia	B1	2016-11-10
DK178688B1	Denmark	B1	2016-11-14
CN106126047A	China	A	2016-11-16
AU2016100254B4	Australia	B4	2016-11-17
AU2016231541B1	Australia	B1	2016-11-17
WO2016144696A3	World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO)	A3	2016-11-24
AU2016100253B4	Australia	B4	2016-12-01
US2016357305A1	United States of America	A1	2016-12-08
US2016357368A1	United States of America	A1	2016-12-08
US2016357390A1	United States of America	A1	2016-12-08
US2016357404A1	United States of America	A1	2016-12-08
CN106227374A	China	A	2016-12-14
CN106227440A	China	A	2016-12-14
WO2016200586A1	World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO)	A1	2016-12-15
DE202016006323U1	Germany	U1	2016-12-20
DK201670463A1	Denmark	A1	2017-01-02
DK201500576A1	Denmark	A1	2017-01-09
DK201500581A1	Denmark	A1	2017-01-16
DK178784B1	Denmark	B1	2017-01-23

Showing 100 of 406

Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Interacting with a Control Object While Dragging Another Object.

Abstract

Term

Priority claims12

Members406

Numbers

Titles

Classification